Your email was sent successfully. Check your inbox.

An error occurred while sending the email. Please try again.

Proceed reservation?

Export
Filter
  • Online Resource  (548)
  • Dordrecht : Springer
  • Humanities  (346)
  • Electronic books  (171)
  • Social Sciences
Datasource
Material
  • Online Resource  (548)
  • Book  (10)
Language
Years
Author, Corporation
Publisher
Keywords
Subjects(RVK)
  • 1
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    International handbook on gender and demographic processes (2018)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789402412901
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (vii, 359 Seiten)
    Series Statement: International handbooks of population volume 8
    Series Statement: International handbooks of population
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    DDC: 304.6
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Sociology ; Demography ; Sex (Psychology) ; Gender expression ; Gender identity ; Social Sciences ; Demography ; Gender Studies ; Sociology, general
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-024-1290-1
    URL: Volltext  (URL des Erstveröffentlichers)
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/978-94-024-1290-1
    URL: Volltext  (URL des Erstveröffentlichers)
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    HU Berlin
    Würzburg UB
    BSZ
    BVB
    HBZ
    Bayreuth UB
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 2
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Children’s Understandings of Well-being : Towards a Child Standpoint (2017)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789402408294
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XX, 280 p. 16 illus, online resource)
    Series Statement: Children’s Well-Being: Indicators and Research 14
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Social Sciences
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    Parallel Title: Printed edition
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Child development ; Social work ; Well-being ; Children ; Psychology ; Social Sciences ; Kind ; Wohlbefinden
    Abstract: The book presented here describes an outstanding attempt, not only to include children’s views but to partner with children to develop the concept of well-being and to study the phenomenon as the children understand it. The authors do this by placing the concept of children’s well-being within the existing discourses on the topic and by developing their unique theoretical approach to the concept. Then, and based on what children told them, the authors identify different domains and dimensions of children’s well-being and touch upon its multifaceted nature. The book concludes with drawing research and policy implications from an integrated summary of the study’s findings and lists indicator concepts that present an alternative framework and conceptualisation of well-being from a child standpoint
    Abstract: Preface -- Introduction -- Part I -- Chapter 1. Tracing Conceptualizations of Well-Being: Locating the Child in Well-Being Discourse -- Chapter 2. Researching Children’s Understandings of Well-Being -- Part II -- Chapter 3. Overviewing a Child Standpoint on Well-Being -- Chapter 4. Agency, Autonomy and Asymmetry in Child-Adult Relations -- Chapter 5. Safety and Ontological Insecurity: Contesting the Meaning of Child Protection -- Chapter 6. Self, Identity and Well-Being -- Part III -- Chapter 7. Activities as Autonomy and Competence: The Meaning and Experience of Leisure for Well-Being -- Chapter 8. Money, Markets and Moral Identity: Exploring Children’s Understandings and Experiences of Economic Well-Being -- Chapter 9. Children’s Health and Well-Being -- Part IV.-Chapter 10. Findings and Conclusions on Well-Being from the Unique Vantage Point of Children -- Appendix
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-024-0829-4
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 3
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Child Maltreatment Fatalities in the United States : Four Decades of Policy, Program, and Professional Responses (2017)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401775830
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XV, 169 p. 11 illus, online resource)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Social Sciences
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Douglas, Emily M., 1973 - Child maltreatment fatalities in the United States
    Parallel Title: Printed edition
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Maternal and child health services ; Criminology ; Social work ; Child psychology ; School psychology ; Social Sciences ; USA ; Kindesmisshandlung ; Kindesvernachlässigung ; Tötung ; Prävention ; USA ; Kindesmisshandlung ; Kindesvernachlässigung ; Tötung ; Prävention
    Abstract: This book focuses on the prevention of child abuse and neglect deaths in the U.S. In 2013 1,520 children died from maltreatment. This book defines child maltreatment fatalities (CMFs) and discusses the prevalence of deaths in the U.S. over the last several decades. It addresses the known risk factors for maltreatment deaths including child, parent, the parent-child relationship, and household risk factors. The main focus of the book addresses the responses and interventions that have been put in place in order to prevent CMFs: the child welfare profession, child death review teams, safe haven laws, criminal justice responses, public education, and new, federal efforts in the U.S. to reduce CMFs in the U.S. The book finishes by making recommendations for researchers, practitioners, and decision-makers about how to prevent fatal maltreatment among children in the U.S
    Abstract: Chapter 1. Introduction and Justification for the Book -- Chapter 2: What is Fatal Child Maltreatment -- Chapter 3. Risk Factors for Fatal Child Maltreatment -- Chapter 4. The Intersection of the Child Welfare Profession and Maltreatment Fatalities -- Chapter 5. Child Death Review Teams -- Chapter 6. State Safe Haven Laws -- Chapter 7. Criminal Justice and Legal Reforms in Response to Fatal Maltreatment -- Chapter 8. Prevention of Fatal Child Maltreatment: What Are We Doing That Is Working? -- Chapter 9. Conclusions and Recommendations Moving Forward in the Arena of Fatal Child Maltreatment
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-017-7583-0
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Klappentext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 4
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Climate Change and Human Responses : a Zooarchaeological Perspective (2017)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789402411065
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (xx, 232 Seiten) , Illustrationen, Diagramme, Karten
    Series Statement: Vertebrate Paleobiology and Paleoanthropology
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    DDC: 301
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Climate change ; Zoology ; Geoecology ; Environmental geology ; Anthropology ; Archaeology ; Social Sciences ; Climate Change/Climate Change Impacts ; Geoecology/Natural Processes ; Archäologie ; Sozialwissenschaften ; Umweltveränderung ; Anthropogene Klimaänderung ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Anthropogene Klimaänderung ; Umweltveränderung
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-024-1106-5
    URL: Volltext  (URL des Erstveröffentlichers)
    URL: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/978-94-024-1106-5
    URL: Volltext  (URL des Erstveröffentlichers)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    KOBV
    BVB
    HBZ
  • 5
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Paleoanthropology of the Balkans and Anatolia : Human Evolution and its Context (2016)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789402408744
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (XII, 331 p. 148 illus., 90 illus. in color)
    Series Statement: Vertebrate Paleobiology and Paleoanthropology
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    DDC: 301
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Paleontology ; Geobiology ; Environmental geography ; Evolutionary biology ; Anthropology ; Archaeology ; Social Sciences ; Biogeosciences ; Environmental Geography ; Evolutionary Biology ; Archäologie ; Paläontologie ; Sozialwissenschaften ; Archäologie ; Paläanthropologie ; Balkanhalbinsel ; Anatolien ; Konferenzschrift 2012 ; Konferenzschrift 2012 ; Balkanhalbinsel ; Anatolien ; Paläanthropologie ; Archäologie
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-024-0874-4
    URL: Volltext  (URL des Erstveröffentlichers)
    URL: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/978-94-024-0874-4
    URL: Volltext  (URL des Erstveröffentlichers)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    KOBV
    BVB
    HBZ
  • 6
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbook of happiness research in Latin America (2016)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401772037
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (623 Seiten)
    Series Statement: International handbooks of quality-of-life
    Series Statement: International Handbooks of Quality-Of-Life Ser.
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Handbook of Happiness Research in Latin America
    DDC: 300
    Keywords: Quality of Life_xResearch ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: This book presents original happiness research from and about a region that shows unexpectedly high levels of happiness. Even when Latin American countries cannot be classified as high-income countries their population do enjoy, on average, high happiness levels. The book draws attention to some important factors that contribute to the happiness of people, such as: relational values, human relations, solidarity networks, the role of the family, and the availability and gratifying using of leisure time. In a world where happiness is acquiring greater relevance as a final social and personal aim both the academic community and the social-actors and policy-makers community would benefit from Happiness Research in Latin America. Mariano Rojas is Professor of Economics at Facultad Latinoamericana de Ciencias Sociales, Sede México and at Universidad Popular Autónoma del Estado de Puebla. He got his undergraduate degree in economics from Universidad de Costa Rica and his M.A. and Ph.D degrees in economics from The Ohio State University, United States. His areas of research are: Happiness, Subjective Well-Being, Quality of Life, Economic Development, and Applied Microeconomics. He has been a member of ISQOLS since 2000, and performed as vice-president of finance from 2007 to 2008 and as vice-president of external affairs from 2011 to 2012. In 2009 he was awarded ISQOLS' Research Fellow Award as well as JOHS' Outstanding Reviewer Award. Mariano Rojas coordinates the Mexican Initiative Measuring the Progress of Societies: A Perspective from Mexico. This initiative received the Best New Initiative Award by OECD Global Project on Measuring the Progress of Societies in 2009 at the Busan, Korea 3rd World Forum.
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Contributors; 1: Happiness, Research, and Latin America; 1.1 Happiness; 1.1.1 Happiness Is Important; 1.1.2 Happiness Is an Ultimate Goal; 1.1.3 Happiness Motivates Human Action; 1.2 The Study of Happiness. The Old Traditions of Imputation and Presumption; 1.2.1 The Imputation Tradition; 1.2.2 The Presumption Tradition; 1.3 The Scientific Study of Happiness. Happiness Research; 1.3.1 Happiness Is a Life Experience of Being Well; 1.3.2 The Epistemology of Happiness. Knowing Happiness; 1.3.3 Measuring Happiness; 1.4 Happiness in Latin America; 1.4.1 The Region
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.4.2 Latin America Is a Happy Region. Is This a Paradox?1.5 Happiness Research in Latin America; 1.5.1 Researching Happiness in Latin America; 1.5.2 The Contributions in the Handbook; 1.6 Reconsideration of the Wealth of Nations; Bibliography; Part I: The Relevance of Latin American Happiness; 2: The Singularity of Latin American Patterns of Happiness; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Traditional View of Social Progress and Political Emergence of Subjective Indicators; 2.3 Inconsistency Comes into Play: The Curious Levels of Happiness in Latin America
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4 Explaining ``Inconsistency´´ I: Individual Determinants of Happiness in Latin America2.5 Explaining ``Inconsistency´´ II: The Impact of Social Relations; 2.6 Overview: Consistency in the Indicators and Political Challenges; Bibliography; 3: The Social Psychology of Latin American Happiness; 3.1 Latin American Happiness; 3.2 Roots of Latin American Happiness: Small Traditional Villages; 3.3 From Andean Tradition to Modernity: Peri-urban Pueblos; 3.4 A Rural to Peri-urban Amazonian Corridor: Differences and Similarities with the Andes
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.5 Shantytowns: From Bucolic Happiness to Urban-Marginal Stress3.6 Urban Latin American Happiness Structure; 3.6.1 Optimistic Adaptation; 3.6.2 A Good Place to Live; 3.6.3 Home; 3.7 Conclusions: Latin American Happiness Processes; 3.7.1 Family and Social Relations; 3.7.2 Latin America: An Imperfect Place to Live, the Happy Adventure Park; 3.7.3 Optimistic Adaptation as a Key Feature of Latin American Happiness Adaptation; 3.7.4 Origins and Final Conclusions of Latin American Happiness; Bibliography; 4: The Relevance of Happiness: Choosing Between Development Paths in Latin America
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.1 Introduction4.2 Happiness Provides New Relevant Information; 4.2.1 Standard Economic Theory: Income and Well-Being; 4.2.2 The Limitations of Income as a Proxy for Well-Being. Findings from Happiness Research; 4.2.2.1 Persons Are Socially Immersed; 4.2.2.2 People May Raise Their Aspirations and Change Their Evaluation Norms; 4.2.2.3 People May Easily Adapt to the New Consumption Goods; 4.2.2.4 Bias Towards Economic Goods. No Consideration of Relational Goods; 4.2.2.5 Not All Needs Are Material. Human Beings Do Also Have Psychological Needs
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2.2.6 There Is More to Life than the Standard of Living
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-017-7203-7
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 7
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbook on Well-Being of Working Women (2016)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401798976 , 9401798966
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (ix, 821 Seiten)
    Series Statement: International Handbooks of Quality-of-Life
    Series Statement: International Handbooks of Quality-Of-Life Ser.
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    DDC: 306
    Keywords: Quality of Life_xResearch ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Intro -- Contents -- Part I: Introduction -- 1: Uncovering the Complexities of the Relationship Between Women and Well-Being in the Workplace: An Introduction -- Part I - Introduction -- Part II - Gender, Social Group Hierarchy, and Well-Being of Working Women -- Part III - Women Leaders and Well-Being -- Part IV - Professional Context and the Well-Being of Working Women -- Part V - Public Policy, Organizational Policy and Societal Influences on the Well-Being of Working Women -- Part VI - Cross-Cultural and Country-Specific Context and the Well-Being of Working Women: A Global Perspective -- Part VII - Epilogue -- Conclusion -- References -- Part II: Gender, Social Group Hierarchy, and Well-Being of Working Women -- 2: Workplace Discrimination and the Wellbeing of Minority Women: Overview, Prospects, and Implications -- Introduction -- Discrimination and Wellbeing in the Workplace -- Discrimination and Health Influences -- Resource Deficits and Illness Vulnerability -- Minority Women and Discrimination -- Tokenism and Stereotypes -- Workplace Harassment -- Minority Women, Discrimination and Wellbeing -- Organizational and Individual Interventions for Minority Women Wellbeing -- Organizational Level -- Individual Level -- Conclusion -- References -- 3: Fat Women Need Not Apply: Employment Weight Discrimination Against Women -- Fat Women Need Not Apply: Weight Discrimination in Employment Against Women -- Research on Weight Discrimination in Employment -- Perceived Employment Discrimination -- Weight-Related Wage Penalty -- Legal Protection -- Weight Prejudice -- Employer Justifications -- Practical Implications -- Future Research Directions -- Conclusion -- References -- 4: Countering Heteronormativity -- Lesbians and Wellbeing in the Workplace -- Introduction and Background -- Sexual Orientation and Research in the Organisational Context.
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Part I: Introduction; 1: Uncovering the Complexities of the Relationship Between Women and Well-Being in the Workplace: An Introduction; Part I - Introduction; Part II - Gender, Social Group Hierarchy, and Well-Being of Working Women; Part III - Women Leaders and Well-Being; Part IV - Professional Context and the Well-Being of Working Women; Part V - Public Policy, Organizational Policy and Societal Influences on the Well-Being of Working Women; Part VI - Cross-Cultural and Country-Specific Context and the Well-Being of Working Women: A Global Perspective; Part VII - Epilogue
    Description / Table of Contents: ConclusionReferences; Part II: Gender, Social Group Hierarchy, and Well-Being of Working Women ; 2: Workplace Discrimination and the Wellbeing of Minority Women: Overview, Prospects, and Implications; Introduction; Discrimination and Wellbeing in the Workplace; Discrimination and Health Influences; Resource Deficits and Illness Vulnerability; Minority Women and Discrimination; Tokenism and Stereotypes; Workplace Harassment; Minority Women, Discrimination and Wellbeing; Organizational and Individual Interventions for Minority Women Wellbeing; Organizational Level; Individual Level
    Description / Table of Contents: ConclusionReferences; 3: Fat Women Need Not Apply: Employment Weight Discrimination Against Women; Fat Women Need Not Apply: Weight Discrimination in Employment Against Women; Research on Weight Discrimination in Employment; Perceived Employment Discrimination; Weight-Related Wage Penalty; Legal Protection; Weight Prejudice; Employer Justifications; Practical Implications; Future Research Directions; Conclusion; References; 4: Countering Heteronormativity; Lesbians and Wellbeing in the Workplace; Introduction and Background
    Description / Table of Contents: Sexual Orientation and Research in the Organisational Context Queer Performance and Lesbian Identity; Experiences of Butch Lesbians in Negotiating Identity in the Interview Context; Intersectionality; Conclusions and Directions for Further Research; Suggested Further Reading; References; 5: "Women Like You Keep Women Like Me Down": Understanding Intergenerational Conflict and Work-Life Balance from a Discourse Perspective; A Communication Perspective; Work-Life Balance; Life Cycle Theory; Generational Differences Around Work-Life Balance
    Description / Table of Contents: Deconstructing Intergenerational Discord: Preliminary FindingsRevisiting the Context for Conflict: The Gendered Workplace; Expanding the Research Agenda for Work-Life; Rethinking Intergenerational Conflict as Rejection of the Gendered Workplace; Self-Employment; A Partial Return to the Workforce; Rejection of Current Workplace; Conclusion; References; 6: Sexual Harassment: Undermining the Wellbeing of Working Women; Definitions of Sexual Harassment; United States Legal Definition; Legal Definitions Across National Contexts; Definitions in Social Science
    Description / Table of Contents: Prevalence of Sexual Harassment
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 8
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Data protection on the move : current developments in ICT and privacy/data protection (2016)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401773768
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (XX, 476 Seiten)
    Series Statement: Law, governance and technology series volume 24
    Series Statement: Law, Governance and Technology Ser. v.24
    Series Statement: Law, governance and technology series
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Data protection on the move
    DDC: 302.2
    RVK:
    PZ 3250
    Keywords: Philosophy ; Electronic books ; Konferenzschrift ; Konferenzschrift ; Europäische Union ; Datenschutz
    Abstract: Intro -- Preface -- Contents -- Mind the Air Gap -- Abstract -- 1 Introduction -- 2 Privacy Concerns for Domestic Robots -- 3 Why Privacy Need Not Be a Problem: Unravelling the Arguments -- 4 Mind the Air Gap: Prevention Rather Than Cure -- 5 Air Gaps and Domestic and Service Robots: A Look at the Issues -- 6 The Weaknesses of Air Gaps Revisited -- 7 Conclusion: A Plea for Privacy Before Design -- Bibliography -- Europe Versus Facebook: An Imbroglio of EU Data Protection Issues -- Abstract -- 1 Introduction -- 2 The Safe Harbor Program -- 3 Factual and Legal Background -- 4 Comment and Analysis -- 4.1 Article 3 of the Safe Harbor Agreement -- 4.2 The EU Data Protection Directive -- 4.3 The EU Charter -- 5 Additional Issues -- 5.1 What if There Is no Transfer? -- 5.2 What if Facebook Inc. Must Comply with the Directive Pursuant to Article 4? -- 5.3 Can the DPAs Enforce Their Decisions? -- 6 Conclusion -- The Context-Dependence of Citizens' Attitudes and Preferences Regarding Privacy and Security -- Abstract -- 1 Introduction -- 2 Measuring People's Perceptions of Security Technologies -- 2.1 Operationalization of Privacy -- 2.2 Operationalization of Security -- 2.3 Vignettes as a Tool for Contextualisation -- 2.4 Data Collection -- 3 Descriptive Results -- 4 Determinant of Citizen's Acceptance of Specific Surveillance Oriented Security Technologies -- 4.1 Methodology -- 4.2 Results -- 5 Discussion of Results and Conclusions -- Bibliography -- On Locational Privacy in the Absence of Anonymous Payments -- Abstract -- 1 Introduction -- 2 Overview -- 2.1 Problem Space -- 2.2 Approach -- 2.3 Roaming -- 3 System Design -- 3.1 Group Signatures and XSGS -- 3.2 Bootstrapping the System -- 3.3 Setting up New Charging Stations -- 3.4 Decommission of Charging Stations -- 3.5 Ensuring Authenticity of Metering Data -- 3.6 Transmission of Metering Data.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 9
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Research in early childhood science education (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401795050
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 online resource)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Parallel Title: Print version Research in Early Childhood Science Education
    DDC: 372.35
    Keywords: Science Study and teaching (Preschool) ; Science ; Study and teaching (Early childhood) ; Science ; Study and teaching (Early childhood) ; Research ; Electronic books
    Abstract: This book emphasizes the significance of teaching science in early childhood classrooms, reviews the research on what young children are likely to know about science and provides key points on effectively teaching science to young children. Science education, an integral part of national and state standards for early childhood classrooms, encompasses not only content-based instruction but also process skills, creativity, experimentation and problem-solving. By introducing science in developmentally appropriate ways, we can support young children's sensory explorations of their world and provi
    Description / Table of Contents: Foreword; Contents; Chapter 1: The Inclusion of Science in Early Childhood Classrooms; Science and the Early Childhood Years; Purpose and Rationale; Organization of Chapters; Closure; References; Chapter 2: Young Children's Motivation for Learning Science; Conceptualizing Motivation and Theoretical Frameworks; Children's Science Motivation During Preschool and the Early Grades; Children's Curiosity and Questions About Science; Children's Interest in Science Activities; Children's Motivational Beliefs About Learning Science; Changes in Science Motivation from the Early to Later Grades
    Description / Table of Contents: Experiences Shape Children's Motivation for Learning ScienceFew Opportunities to Engage in Meaningful Science; Low Disciplinary Integrity of Science Lessons; Science Is Often Not Recognizable in Science Lessons; Declines in Science Motivation and Misunderstanding the Nature of Science Are Not Inevitable; Measuring Young Children's Science Motivation; Methodological Approaches; Methodological Concerns; Methodological and Theoretical Advancements Needed for Research of Young Children's Science Motivation; Relevance of Science Motivation Research to Classroom Teaching Practices
    Description / Table of Contents: ReferencesChapter 3: Young Children's Ideas About Earth and Space Science Concepts; Earth Science Concepts; Rain and Clouds (Mechanism of Rain Fall); Wind; Thunder and Lightning; Summaries of Children's Understanding of Earth Science Concepts; Space Science Concepts; Shape of the Earth; Day and Night Cycle; Seasons; Lunar Concepts; Summaries of Children's Understanding of Space Science Concepts; Directions for Future Research; References; Chapter 4: Young Children's Ideas About Physical Science Concepts; Reviewing the Research Literature; Young Children' Ideas About Matter
    Description / Table of Contents: Young Children' Ideas About Heat and Temperature Young Children' Ideas About Evaporation, Condensation and the Water Cycle; Young Children' Ideas About Forces and Motion; Young Children' Ideas About Floating and Sinking; Young Children' Ideas About Electricity; Young Children' Ideas About Light; Perspectives and Frameworks Guiding Research; The Research Methodologies; Evidence of Effectiveness of Intervention Studies; Implications for Classroom Practices; Directions for Future Research; References; Chapter 5: Children's Ideas About Life Science Concepts; Theoretical Frameworks
    Description / Table of Contents: Young Children's Ideas of Life Science Concepts Children's Conceptions of the Distinction Between Living and Non-living; Children's Conceptions of Growth and Development; Young Children's Conceptions of Germs and Contagions; Young Children's Conceptions of Plants and Animals; Research Methods Used to Elicit Young Children's Understandings; Recommendations for Future Research; Implications for Teaching; References; Chapter 6: Too Little, Too Late: Addressing Nature of Science in Early Childhood Education; Introduction; What Is the Nature of Science, and Why Teach It?
    Description / Table of Contents: Developmentally Appropriate Nature of Science for Early Childhood Years
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 10
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Täterprofile bei Gewaltverbrechen : Mythos, Theorie, Praxis und forensische Anwendung des Profilings (German Edition) (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783540333456
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (387 p.)
    Parallel Title: Print version Täterprofile bei Gewaltverbrechen: Mythos, Theorie, Praxis und forensische Anwendung des Profilings (German Edition)
    DDC: 304.23
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Wenn Medien über spektakuläre Verbrechen berichten, rücken "Profiler" ins Blickfeld der Öffentlichkeit. Kinofilme wie "Das Schweigen der Lämmer" stellen sie als allwissende Spezialermittler dar. In diesem Buch räumen erfahrene Forscher, Kriminologen, Kriminalpsychologen und Juristen mit diesem Mythos auf. Sie geben Einblick in die reale Praxis der modernen Fallanalyse. Diese hat sich rasant entwickelt - heutzutage steht ein breites Spektrum an Methoden zur Verfügung. Neu in der 2. Auflage: Kapitel ausgewiesener Experten zur Fallanalyse in den Anwendungsbereichen forensische Gutachten und Psych
    Description / Table of Contents: 14 Neue Wege in der Ermittlungspraxis15 Versionen eines Mordes; Forensische Anwendung; 16 Tatortanalyse in der forensischen Psychiatrie; 17 Fallanalytische Verfahren in der Behandlung von Straftätern in Justizvollzugs anstalten; 18 Die Zusammenarbeit zwischen Fallanalyse und forensischer Psychiatrie; Quellenverzeichnis; Sachverzeichnis;
    Description / Table of Contents: CONTENTS; 1 Täterprofile und Fallanalyse; Mythos; 2 »Meine Mutter war eine Holmes«; 3 Mythos und Mythode; Theorie; 4 Auf der Suche nach der Struktur des Verbrechens; 5 Wege der Aufklärung; 6 Tausend Spuren und ihre Erzählung; 7 Facetten des Verbrechens; 8 Sexuell assoziierte Tötungsdelikte; 9 Die Bedeutung rechtsmedizinischer Untersuchungsergebnisse bei der Erstellung von Fallanalysen; 10 Geografische Fallanalyse; 11 »Was ist das nur für ein Mensch, der so etwas tun konnte?«; 12 Die Bedeutung der operativen Fall analyse im Strafprozess; Ermittlungspraxis; 13 Fallanalyse im Einsatz
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 11
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Geographies of knowledge and power (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401799607
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource , color illustrations
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Knowledge and space / Klause Tschira symposia volume 7
    Series Statement: Knowledge and Space Ser. v.7
    Parallel Title: Print version Geographies of Knowledge and Power
    DDC: 306.4/2
    Keywords: Geography Social aspects ; Power (Social sciences) ; Knowledge, Sociology of ; Industrial management ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Interest in relations between knowledge, power, and space has a long tradition in a range of disciplines, but it was reinvigorated in the last two decades through critical engagement with Foucault and Gramsci. This volume focuses on relations between knowledge and power. It shows why space is fundamental in any exercise of power and explains which roles various types of knowledge play in the acquisition, support, and legitimization of power. Topics include the control and manipulation of knowledge through centers of power in historical contexts, the geopolitics of knowledge about world politic
    Description / Table of Contents: Acknowledgments; Contents; Contributors; 1: Power, Knowledge, and Space: A Geographical Introduction; References; 2: Relations Between Knowledge and Power: An Overview of Research Questions and Concepts; No Power Without Knowledge, No Knowledge Without Power; Factual Knowledge and Orientation Knowledge: Differences Between Logos and Mythos; Factual Knowledge; Orientation Knowledge; Conceptions and Definitions of Power and Their Relationship to Knowledge; How Can Power Be Conceptualized and Defined?; How Can Relations Between Knowledge and Power Be Conceptualized and Explained?
    Description / Table of Contents: Asymmetry of Power Relations Can Factual Knowledge Be Clearly Differentiated from Orientation Knowledge?; Factual Knowledge and Power; Functions of Factual Knowledge in Acquiring and Retaining Power; The Search for Absolute Truth or Getting on in the Life World?; Orientation Knowledge and Power; What Functions Does Orientation Knowledge Have for a Social System?; The Role of Orientation Knowledge in the Construction of the Self and the Other; Orientation Knowledge and Moral Exclusion; With Which Methods Do Power Centers Influence the Creation and Spread of Knowledge?
    Description / Table of Contents: Manipulation of Epistemic Perspectives Control of Access to Information, Censorship of Information, Bibliocide, and Memorycide,; Manipulation of Public Attention; Subjectivity and Credibility of Experts; Crisis of Expertise?; Scholars as Instruments of Politics; Conclusion; References; 3: Enabling Knowledge; Knowledgeability and Democracy; Overview; The Terms; Theories of Democracy and Civil Society; Reconciling Democracy and Expertise; Reconciling Democracy and Knowledge as Property; Enabling Knowledge?; Concluding Remarks; References
    Description / Table of Contents: 4: Gabriel's Map: Cartography and Corpography in Modern WarI Would Rather Be in France . . .; The Optical War and Cartographic Vision; "Clockwork War" and the Mathematics of the Battlefield; The Corpography of the Slimescape; Conclusion; Coda; References; 5: Telling the Future: Reflections on the Status of Divination in Ancient Near Eastern Politics; References; 6: Who Gets the Past? The Changing Face of Islamic Authority and Religious Knowledge; Competing Claims to Authoritative Religious Knowledge; Public Islam and the Common Good; Public Islam and Modernity
    Description / Table of Contents: Religious and Secular Identities Authorities and Audiences; References; 7: "An Heavenly Kingdom Shall Descend": How Millennialism Spread from New England to the United States of America; Introduction; New England as a Millennial Seedbed; The Impact of the Great Awakening; The Apocalyptic Interpretation of American Wars; The United States as the Apocalyptic "New Order of the Ages"; Conclusion; References; 8: The Power of Words and the Tides of History: Reflections on Man and Nature and Silent Spring; Man and Nature: A Book and Its Reception; Man and Nature: The Fate and Power of Words
    Description / Table of Contents: Silent Spring: The Fate and Power of Words
    Note: "Klaus Tschira Stiftung gemeinnützige GmbH"--Cover , Includes bibliographical references and index
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 12
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Couple resilience : emerging perspectives (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401799096
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (xx, 210 pages) , color illustrations
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Parallel Title: Print version Couple Resilience : Emerging Perspectives
    DDC: 306.8
    RVK:
    MS 1930
    Keywords: Resilience (Personality trait) ; Couples Psychology ; Quality of Life_xResearch ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung
    Abstract: This distinctive volume expands our understanding of couple resilience by identifying and exploring specific mechanisms unique to intimate relationships that facilitate positive adaptation to life challenges. Committed partnerships represent a unique form of relational alliance that offers an opportunity and challenge to go beyond the self - to develop as individuals and as a relationship. The contributors to this volume represent a range of perspectives that integrate conventional relationship science and innovative empirical and theoretical work on the importance of meaning-making, narrative construction, intersubjectivity, forgiveness, and positive emotion in couple life. The volume also offers a unique anchor point - 'We-ness' as it relates to the intersection between shared, and personal identity and well-being. Under-examined relational contexts such as resilience among LGBT partners and sexual resilience during illness adds further refinement of thought and application
    Description / Table of Contents: Couple resilience and we-nessResilience in couples : a view of the landscape / Karen Skerret -- Theoretical and methodological underpinnings of resilience in couples : locating the "we" / Karen Fergus -- Resilient processes and applications to specific populations -- Resilience in lesbians and gay couples / Arlene Istar Lev -- Sexual resilience in couples / Andrea M. Beck and John W. Robinson -- Dyadic adaptation to chronic illness : the importance of considering context in understanding couples' resilience / Kristi E. Gamarel and Tracey A. Revenson -- Relationships and the neurobiology of resilience / Brent J. Atkinson -- Investigations into facets of couple resilience -- Mutuality and the marital engagement-type of union scale [me to us] : empirical support for a clinical instrument in couple therapy / Jefferson A. Singer, Beate Labunko, Nicole Alea, and Jenna L. Baddeley -- Identification with the relationship as essential to marital resilience : theory, applications and evidence / David W. Reid and Saunia Ahmed -- "We-ness" in relationship defining memories and marital satisfaction / Nicole Alea, Jefferson A. Singer, and Beate Labunko -- Forgiveness : a route to healing emotional injuries and building resiliency / Catalina Woldarsky Meneses and Leslie S. Greenberg -- Looking back, moving forward -- Resilient couple coping revisited : building relationship muscle / Karen Fergus and Karen Skerrett.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext
    URL: http://bvbr.bib-bvb.de:8991/F?func=service&doc_library=BVB01&local_base=BVB01&doc_number=028161145&sequence=000001&line_number=0001&func_code=DB_RECORDS&service_type=MEDIA
    URL: http://bvbr.bib-bvb.de:8991/F?func=service&doc_library=BVB01&local_base=BVB01&doc_number=028161145&sequence=000003&line_number=0002&func_code=DB_RECORDS&service_type=MEDIA
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    HU Berlin
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 13
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Horizons of Authenticity in Phenomenology, Existentialism, and Moral Psychology : Essays in Honor of Charles Guignon (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401794428
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIII, 372 p. 4 illus. in color, online resource)
    Series Statement: Contributions To Phenomenology, In Cooperation with The Center for Advanced Research in Phenomenology 74
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Horizons of authenticity in phenomenology, existentialism, and moral psychology
    RVK:
    CI 1120
    RVK:
    CI 1130
    Keywords: Philosophy (General) ; Phenomenology ; Humanities ; Consciousness ; Philosophy ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Phänomenologie ; Existenzialismus ; Existenzphilosophie ; Authentizität ; Ethik ; Moralpsychologie
    Abstract: This volume centers on the exploration of the ways in which the canonical texts and thinkers of the phenomenological and existential tradition can be utilized to address contemporary, concrete philosophical issues. In particular, the included essays address the key facets of the work of Charles Guignon, and as such, honor and extend his thought and approach to philosophy. To this end, the four main sections of the volume deal with the question of authenticity, i.e. what it means to be an authentic person, the ways in which the phenomenological and existential traditions can impact the sciences, how best to understand the fact of human mortality, and, finally, the ways philosophical reflection can help address current questions of value. The volume is designed primarily to serve as a secondary resource for students and specialists interested in rediscovering the practical application of existential and phenomenological thought. The collection of scholarly essays, then, could be used in conjunction with some of the more recent scholarship concerning the practical value of philosophy. Along with contributing to previous scholarship, the essays in this proposed volume attempt to update and expand the scope of phenomenological and existential inquiry
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-017-9442-8
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 14
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Public Policy Making in the Western Balkans : Case Studies of Selected Economic and Social Policy Reforms (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401793469
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XV, 244 p. 25 illus, online resource)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Development Economics ; Social policy ; Social Sciences
    Abstract: Developing and ‘transition’ economies face myriad challenges in their attempts to achieve and maintain political stability and foster the economic growth essential for national security, the social well-being of current citizens, and sustainable environments for future generations. Governments in the Western Balkans have striven to achieve all of the above, and this volume assesses the nature of their experiences as well as the level of their success in doing so. Featuring detailed case studies of public policy reforms in the region as well as comparative analysis on a range of indicators, the book analyzes the role of key players in setting the political agenda as well as implementing policy reforms. It also distils the lessons that can be learned from the Western Balkan experience, recommending strategies for enhancing the policy making process. In addition, it examines the developmental role played by the full spectrum of policy actors, including the private sector, NGOs, special interest groupings, international financial institutions, donor nations and the EU. Each case study has been prepared by academics with deep knowledge and experience of the western Balkans, and addresses a core set of questions: identifying the policy issue and its broader context, defining the roles of specific individuals in formulating policy and reform, and assessing the influence of networks and coalitions in the policy making process. With so little detailed literature on public policy making in a group of nations strategically positioned between Europe, Russia and the near East, the detailed insights provided by this volume will be widely welcomed. Our book provides case studies of specific public policy reform episodes in selected Western Balkan post-conflict and transition countries. The focus of these case studies extends beyond the technical aspects and entails substantive examination of the policy actors, constituencies, and politics that ultimately shape the policy that emerges from the policy making process. This analysis draws lessons for strengthening the quality of policies, the transparency, consistency, and governance of the policy making process, and ultimately for contributing to economic and social development of the region
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-017-9346-9
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 15
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    International handbook of semiotics (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401794046
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1000 pages)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Parallel Title: Print version International Handbook of Semiotics
    DDC: 302.2
    Keywords: Semiotics ; Semiotics ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung
    Abstract: This book provides an extensive overview and analysis of current work on semiotics that is being pursued globally in the areas of literature, the visual arts, cultural studies, media, the humanities, natural sciences and social sciences. Semiotics-also known as structuralism-is one of the major theoretical movements of the 20th century and its influence as a way to conduct analyses of cultural products and human practices has been immense. This is a comprehensive volume that brings together many otherwise fragmented academic disciplines and currents, uniting them in the framework of semiotic
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Contributors; Chapter-1; Apologia; Part I; Historical and Conceptual Foundations of Semiotics; Chapter-2; Semiotics "Today": The Twentieth-Century Founding and Twenty-First-Century Prospects; 2.1 Preliminary Overview; 2.2 Outline of the Framework; 2.2.1 Standpoint of the Chapter; 2.2.2 Synchrony's Inevitable Seepage into Diachrony: The Historicity of Human Use of Signs; 2.2.3 The Nominalist Question; 2.2.4 The Actual Formation of a "Community of Inquirers" Focused on Signs; 2.3.1 The Initial Foundation Proposed in the Twentieth Century for a New "Science of Signs"
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.2 The Challenge to Saussure's Stipulative Foundation2.3.3 Shifting the Semiotic Enterprise to an Adequate Foundation; 2.3.4 Remodeling Anthroposemiosis as the Human Use of Signs; 2.3.5 Furthering the Foundation: An Action of Signs Beyond the Animal Umwelt; 2.3.6 The Place of Peirce, After Poinsot, in Displacing the Pars Pro Toto Fallacy; 2.3.7 Setting the Record Straight on What Semiotics Is All About; 2.3.8 "Science" or "Doctrine" of Signs?; 2.3.9 Does the Action of Signs Reach Even Beyond the Land of the Living?; 2.3.10 Semiotics in the Twenty-First Century's Dawn: Sebeok's Shaping Role
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.11 After Sebeok and Beyond: Completing the Compass of Semiotic Understanding2.4 Projecting What We Have Learned About Interdisciplinarity: From 330 BC to c. AD 2075; 2.4.1 Tracing from Within the Present a Long Trajectory; 2.4.2 The Triangle of Words, Thoughts, and Things; 2.4.3 Premodern Background to Understanding the Triangle; 2.4.4 Modern Attempts to Semanticize the Triangle; 2.4.5 Aristotle's Caveat on the Need to Understand the Triangle Through "An Investigation Distinct" from Inquiries into Logic and Language
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4.6 Causality and the Relationships Within and Constitutive of the Triangle2.4.6.1 Iconic dimension; 2.4.6.2 Symbolic dimension; 2.4.6.3 Indexical dimension as underlying; 2.4.6.4 Entanglement in language of culture with nature; 2.4.6.5 Primary modeling is not "langue"; 2.4.6.6 Diachrony preceding and succeeding "langue's" synchrony; 2.4.7 Brief Excursus on "Deconstruction"; 2.4.8 The Relationships Within and Constitutive of the Triangle; 2.4.8.1 The triangle side #1 between words and things; 2.4.8.2 "Common sense" and Saussure's model; 2.4.8.3 Other-representation vs. self-representation
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4.8.4 "Common sense" again2.4.8.5 The hidden third; 2.4.8.6 The triadic relation; 2.4.8.7 "Common speech" vs. "Langue "; 2.4.8.8 The triangle side #2 between words and things; 2.4.8.9 Experience presupposed to discovering signs; 2.4.8.10 The ascent from sensation; 2.4.8.11 Interaction as produing sensation; 2.4.8.12 Triadicity within sensation; 2.4.8.13 The triangle side #3 between words and things; 2.4.8.14 Words as symptoms vs. words as symbols; 2.4.8.15 The symptom side; 2.4.8.16 The symbol side; 2.4.8.17 Words as manifesting subjectivity
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4.8.18 Words as aiming to establish intersubjectivity
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    HeBIS
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 16
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Ruptured landscapes : landscape, identity and social change (2015)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401799034
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (vii, 173 Seiten) , Illustrationen
    Series Statement: Landscape series volume 19
    Series Statement: Landscape series
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Ruptured landscapes
    DDC: 577
    RVK:
    RB 10841
    Keywords: Anthropology ; Geography ; Humanities ; Landscape ecology ; Regional planning ; Landschaft ; Wahrnehmung ; Soziokultureller Wandel
    Abstract: This volume breaks new ground in the study of landscapes, both rural and urban. The innovative notion of this landscape collection is rupture. The book explores the ways in which societal, economic and cultural changes are transforming the meanings and understandings of landscapes. The text explores both how landscapes are contesting changes in society and changing society. The volume combines empirically fine-grained accounts of landscape rupture, from different parts of the world, with a sustained effort to explore, rethink and analytically extend the concept of rupture itself. The book therefore combines fresh empirical data with innovative theoretical approaches to open understanding of landscape as a dynamic, living entity subject to abrupt change and unpredictable disruptions. Through this dual reflection the volume is able to provide a powerful demonstration of the possibilities that are available for human action, social change and material landscape to combine.
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 17
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Emerging techniques in applied demography (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401789905
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Applied demography series volume 4
    Series Statement: Applied Demography Ser. v.4
    Parallel Title: Print version Emerging Techniques in Applied Demography
    DDC: 304.6
    Keywords: Demography ; Demography ; Study and teaching.. ; Demography ; Research ; Electronic books
    Abstract: By bringing together top-notch demographers, sociologists, economists, statisticians and public health specialists from Asia, Africa, Europe, and North America to examine a wide variety of public and private issues in applied demography, this book spans a wide range of topics. It evaluates population estimates and projections against actual census counts and suggests further improvement of estimates and projection techniques and evaluation procedures; new techniques are proposed for estimating families and households and particular attention is paid to the much-discussed topic of access to health care. Coverage extends to factors influencing health status and elder abuse, child bearing and labor market analysis and the effects of education on labor market outcomes of native white American and immigrant European populations.Methodologically rigorous and pragmatically useful, Emerging Techniques in Applied Demography also examines a wide variety of public and private issues under the field of applied demography. It provides a broad overview of research topics and also reflects substantial development in the field of applied demography. It also bridges the gap between theory and research by providing several examples of work of distinguished applied demographic.
    Description / Table of Contents: Foreword; Acknowledgements; Contents; Contributors; Chapter-1; Introduction; Introduction; Overview of the Sections and Chapters; Section I; Section II; Section III; Section IV; Section V; Conclusion; References; Part I; Evaluation of Population Projections and 2010 Census Counts; Chapter-2; An Evaluation of Population Forecast Errors for Florida and its Counties, 1980-2010; Introduction; Methodology; Forecast Accuracy; State Projections; County Projections; Accounting for Uncertainty; State Projections; County Projections; Conclusion; References; Chapter-3
    Description / Table of Contents: Simplifying Local Area Population and Household Projections with POPARTIntroduction; POPART; Data; Model Validation; Application: Population and Household Projections for Noosa; Assumptions; Results; Conclusions; Software; References; Chapter-4; The Net Undercount of Children in the 2010 U.S. Decennial Census; Introduction; Demographic Analysis Methodology; Using DA to Estimate the Black Population; Data Sources; 2010 Demographic Analysis Results; 2010 DA Estimates for Adults Compared to Children; 2010 DA Estimates for Single Year of Age for Children; Undercount of Children by Sex
    Description / Table of Contents: The Population Under Age 5Discussion; Conclusions; References; Chapter-5; Mathematical Modeling and Projecting Population of Bangladesh by Age and Sex from 2002 to 2031; Introduction; Data and Methods; Model Building; Validation Technique of Model; F-test; Exponential Growth Rate Method; Results of Model Fittings and Discussion; Conclusions and Concluding Remarks; References; Part II; Evaluation of Population Estimates Produced by New and Current Methods; Chapter-6 ; Sub-County Population Estimates Using Administrative Records: A Municipal-Level Case Study in New Mexico; Introduction
    Description / Table of Contents: Materials and MethodsStudy Area: NM Characteristics; The Component Method and Comparison Series ; Database: Inputs, Georeferencing, and Remediation; Evaluating Estimates; Results; Discussion; References; Chapter-7; Housing-Unit Method in Comparison: The Virginia Case; Introduction; Estimation Methodologies; Component Method; Ratio-Correlation Method; Housing Unit Method; Evaluation Measures; What are the Best Input Variables for the House Unit Method?; How Well Do the Three Methods Perform?; Does Averaging Two Methods Improve Accuracy?; Discussion; References; Chapter-8
    Description / Table of Contents: On the Ratio-Correlation Regression Method of Population Estimation and Its VariantsIntroduction; Ratio-Correlation and its Variants; Uncertainty in Ratio-Correlation Estimates; Shortcomings of Regression-Based Techniques; Ratio-Correlation and Synthetic Estimation; Conclusion; 1990-2000 Ratio-Correlation Model: Data, Computations, and 2005 EstimatesWashington State Counties; Appendix; References; Chapter 9; Assessing Accuracy in Postcensal Estimates: Statistical Properties of Different Measures; Introduction; Background; Measure of Equity; Assessment of Bias
    Description / Table of Contents: Considering Census Net Undercount and Its Estimation
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 18
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Flourishing children : defining and testing indicators of positive development (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9401786070 , 9789401786072
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: SpringerBriefs in well-being and quality of life research
    Series Statement: SpringerBriefs in Well-Being and Quality of Life Research Ser.
    Parallel Title: Print version Flourishing children
    DDC: 155.5180287
    Keywords: Developmental psychology ; Behavioral assessment of teenagers ; Adolescent psychology ; Behavioral assessment of teenagers.. ; Adolescent psychology.. ; Developmental psychology ; Electronic books
    Abstract: This volume presents the results of the Flourishing Children Project. The study addressed gaps in the research on indicators of positive development of adolescents. Such indicators are essential for the balanced and scientifically sound study of adolescents. Yet measures of many aspects of flourishing are not available, and when they do exist, they are rarely measured in a developmentally appropriate manner for adolescents. In addition, they are often too long for program evaluations and surveys, have not been tested on diverse populations, nor carefully validated as predictors of positive out
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Abstract; 1 Studying Aspects of Flourishing Among Adolescents; 1.1…Introduction to the Project; 1.1.1 Why Measure What Adolescents Need to Flourish?; 1.2…Overview of Project Activities; 1.2.1 Item Development and Review; 1.2.2 Cognitive Interviews; 1.2.3 Pilot Test; 1.2.4 Psychometric Work; 1.3…Conceptual Framework and Constructs; 1.4…Constructs; 1.4.1 Relationship Skills; 1.4.1.1 Empathy; 1.4.1.2 Social Competence; 1.4.2 Flourishing in Relationships; 1.4.2.1 Parent-Adolescent Relationship; 1.4.2.2 Peer Friendship; 1.4.3 Flourishing in School and Work
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.4.3.1 Diligence and Reliability1.4.3.2 Educational Engagement; 1.4.3.3 Initiative Taking; 1.4.3.4 Thrift; 1.4.3.5 Trustworthiness and Integrity; 1.4.4 Helping Others to Flourish; 1.4.4.1 Altruism; 1.4.4.2 Generosity/Helping Family and Friends; 1.4.5 Environmental Stewardship; 1.4.5.1 Environmental Stewardship; 1.4.6 Personal Flourishing; 1.4.6.1 Forgiveness; 1.4.6.2 Goal Orientation; 1.4.6.3 Gratitude; 1.4.6.4 Hope; 1.4.6.5 Life Satisfaction; 1.4.6.6 Purpose; 1.4.6.7 Spirituality; References; 2 Cognitive Interviews: Designing Survey Questions for Adolescents; 2.1…Introduction
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1.1 Rationale for Cognitive Testing2.1.2 What is Cognitive Interviewing?; 2.1.3 Research on Developing Survey Questions for Adolescents; 2.1.4 Research on Surveying with Parents as Proxy Reporters; 2.1.5 Best Practices for Survey-Item Development; 2.2…Method; 2.2.1 Recruitment; 2.2.2 Sample; 2.2.3 Study Design; 2.2.4 Study Procedures; 2.2.5 Protocols; 2.2.6 Data Analysis; 2.3…Results; 2.3.1 Lesson 1: Reference Groups; 2.3.2 Lesson 2: Construct Selection; 2.3.3 Lesson 3: Clarity of Items; 2.3.4 Lesson 4: Item Salience; 2.3.5 Lesson 5: Parent Reports; 2.3.6 Lesson 6: Response Variability
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.7 Lesson 7: Developing Congruent Response Options2.4…Discussion; References; 3 Pilot Study and Psychometric Analyses; 3.1…Pilot Study Introduction; 3.1.1 Recruitment; 3.1.2 Procedures; 3.1.3 Incentives; 3.1.4 Survey; 3.2…Psychometric Analyses; 3.2.1 Overview of Psychometric Analyses; 3.2.2 Subgroups; 3.2.3 Construct Validity; 3.3…Results; 3.3.1 Relationship Skills; 3.3.1.1 Empathy; 3.3.1.2 Social Competence; 3.3.2 Flourishing in Relationships; 3.3.2.1 Parent-Adolescent Relationship; 3.3.2.2 Peer Friendship; 3.3.3 Flourishing in School and Work; 3.3.3.1 Diligence and Reliability
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.3.3.2 Educational Engagement3.3.3.3 Initiative Taking; 3.3.3.4 Thrift; 3.3.3.5 Trustworthiness and Integrity; 3.3.4 Helping Others to Flourish; 3.3.4.1 Altruism; 3.3.4.2 Generosity/Helping Family and Friends; 3.3.5 Environmental Stewardship; 3.3.5.1 Environmental Stewardship; 3.3.6 Personal Flourishing; 3.3.6.1 Forgiveness; 3.3.6.2 Goal Orientation; 3.3.6.3 Gratitude; 3.3.6.4 Hope; 3.3.6.5 Life Satisfaction; 3.3.6.6 Purpose; 3.3.6.7 Spirituality; 3.4…Discussion; 3.5…Conclusions; References
    Note: Includes bibliographical references
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 19
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    A comparative analysis of European time transfers between generations and genders (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401795913
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (x, 48 pages) , illustrations (some color)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: SpringerBriefs in Population Studies
    Parallel Title: Print version A Comparative Analysis of European Time Transfers between Generations and Genders
    DDC: 304.2/37
    Keywords: Time Sociological aspects ; Time management ; Intergenerational relations ; Europe ; Gender identity ; Research ; Europe ; Time and economic reactions ; Economics ; Sociological aspects ; Europe ; Households ; Europe ; Statistics ; Economic indicators ; Europe ; Electronic books
    Abstract: This comparative study of European time transfers reveals the full extent of transfers in the form of unpaid work and highlights the existence of important gender differences in household time production. A large quantity of goods and services are produced by household members for their own consumption, without involving market transactions. Despite the economic and social importance of unpaid work, these productive activities are largely invisible to traditional national economic accounts. As a consequence, standard measures of intergenerational transfers typically ignore household production, and thus underestimate the overall value of goods and services produced over the life cycle; in particular, the economic contribution of females. The book uses a life course approach to offer policy-relevant insights into the effect of demographic and social change on intergenerational ties and gender inequality in household production.
    Description / Table of Contents: Acknowledgements; Contents; Introduction; Chapter 1; Socio-demographic and Economic Factors Affecting Intergenerational and Gender Relationships in Europe; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Recent Evolution of Labor Market Participation Within Europe and Across European Countries; 1.3 Labor Market Flexibility; 1.4 Household Composition and Transition to Adulthood in Europe; 1.5 Employment Patterns of Households with Young Children; 1.6 Childcare Facilities and Social Expenditure; Discussion and Conclusions; References; Chapter 2
    Description / Table of Contents: Time is Economically Valuable: Production, Consumption and Transfers of Time by Age and Sex2.1 Introduction; 2.2 National Transfer Accounts and the Economic Life Cycle; 2.3 Patterns of Intergenerational Monetary Transfers; 2.4 Monetary Transfers and Beyond: The Role of Time-use; 2.4.1 Incorporating Household Production into National Income and Product Accounts; 2.4.2 Household Production in the Generational Economy; 2.5 Time Use Data; 2.6 Time Production; 2.7 Time Consumption; 2.8 The Life Cycle Deficit; Conclusion; References; Chapter 3
    Description / Table of Contents: Heterogeneity in Unpaid Household Production over the Life Course3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Profiles by Age, Sex, and Household Structure; 3.3 Profiles by Age, Sex and Education; 3.4 Trends Over Time; Conclusion; References; Concluding Remarks
    Note: Includes bibliographical references
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 20
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    50 Schlüsselideen der Menschheit (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783827429070
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (209 p)
    Parallel Title: Print version 50 Schlüsselideen der Menschheit
    DDC: 010
    Keywords: Philosophy.. ; Theology ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Eine Entdeckungsreise zu den großen Ideen und weltbewegenden Konzepten der MenschheitsgeschichtePlatonismus Aristotelismus Die Goldene Regel Altruismus Freiheit Toleranz Skeptizismus Vernunft Strafe Materialismus Relativismus Utilitarismus Existenzialismus Das Böse Schicksal Seele Glaube Fundamentalismus Atheismus Säkularismus Kreationismus Krieg Pflicht Utopie Liberalismus Demokratie Konservatismus Imperialismus Nationalismus Multikulturalismus Gesellschaftsvertrag Republikanismus Kommunismus Faschismus Rassismus Feminismus Islamismus Kapitalismus Globalisierung Klassizismus Romantik Moderne
    Description / Table of Contents: Cover; Title Page; Table of Contents; Einleitung; 01 Platonismus; 02 Aristotelismus; 03 Die Goldene Regel; 04 Altruismus; 05 Freiheit; 06 Toleranz; 07 Skeptizismus; 08 Vernunft; 09 Strafe; 10 Materialismus; 11 Relativismus; 12 Utilitarismus; 13 Existenzialismus; 14 Das Böse; 15 Schicksal; 16 Seele; 17 Glaube; 18 Fundamentalismus; 19 Atheismus; 20 Säkularismus; 21 Kreationismus; 22 Krieg; 23 Pflicht; 24 Utopie; 25 Liberalismus; 26 Demokratie; 27 Konservatismus; 28 Imperialismus; 29 Nationalismus; 30 Multikulturalismus; 31 Gesellschaftsvertrag; 32 Republikanismus; 33 Kommunismus; 34 Faschismus
    Description / Table of Contents: 35 Rassismus36 Feminismus; 37 Islamismus; 38 Kapitalismus; 39 Globalisierung; 40 Klassizismus; 41 Romantik; 42 Moderne; 43 Surrealismus; 44 Zensur; 45 Evolution; 46 Gaia; 47 Chaos; 48 Relativität; 49 Quantenmechanik; 50 Der Urknall; Glossar; Index; Copyright Page
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 21
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbuch Migrationsarbeit (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531199450
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 online resource (386 p.))
    Edition: 2nd ed (Online-Ausg.)
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Handbuch Migrationsarbeit
    DDC: 301
    RVK:
    DO 9000
    RVK:
    MS 3600
    RVK:
    MS 3300
    Keywords: Emigration and immigration - Economic aspects ; Emigration and immigration - Government policy ; Migrant labor ; Migration ; Electronic books ; Einwanderer ; Interkulturelle Sozialarbeit
    Abstract: Inhaltsverzeichnis; Grußwort; MigrantInnenarbeit - eine Einführung; 1 Zielsetz ung des Handbuches; 2 Defi nitionen und Diff erenzierungen; 3 Gliederung und Konzept; Teil A Theoretische Einführung; 1.1 Soziodemografi sche Merkmale der Migrationsbevölkerung; 1 Die Volkszählung des Jahres 2011; 2 Bevölkerungsanteil; 3 Geografi sche Verteilung; 4 Demografi sche Struktur; 5 Sozialstruktur; 5.1 Herkunft und Problemlagen; 5.2 Formaler Bildungsabschluss und berufliche Bildung; 5.3 Arbeitsmarkt und soziale Lage; 5.4 Auswirkungen mangelnder Sprachkompetenz; 6 Religiöse Bindungen: Islam; 7 Überleitung
    Abstract: 1.2 Soziale und politische Teilhabe1 Spezifi ka von Migrationsgruppen; 2 Mediennutz ung3; 2.1 Soziale Umgebung und Medienkonsum; 2.2 Printmedien; 2.3 Fernsehen; 2.4 Computer; 2.5 Auswirkungen des Medienkonsums; 3 Außerhäusliche Freizeit; 4 Mitgliedschaften in Gewerkschaften; 5 Politische Aktivitäten; 5.1 Politisches Interesse; 5.2 Werthaltungen und politische Einstellungen; 5.3 Wahlbeteiligung; 5.4 Parteipräferenzen; 5.5 Mitgliedschaften in Parteien; 5.6 Nicht-elektorale politische Partizipation; 6 Gibt es Parallelgesellschaften?; 7 Schlussbemerkung
    Abstract: 1.3 Gesellschaftliche Teilhabe und Chancengleichheit als Indikatoren für Integration1 Rechtliche Teilhabe und Chancengleichheit; 1.1 Das Allgemeine Gleichbehandlungsgesetz; 1.2 Aufenthaltsdauer und Wahlrecht; 1.3 Einbürgerung; 2 Soziale Teilhabe und Chancengleichheit; 2.1 Sprachliche Voraussetzungen - Sprache als Voraussetzung?; 2.2 Wohnen und sozialräumliche Integration; 2.3 Gesundheit und Migration; 2.4 Vereine und Verbände; 3 Gelungene Integration oder ungleiche Lebensverhältnisse?; 1.4 Interkulturelle Arbeit zwischen Anspruch und Wirklichkeit
    Abstract: 1 Kompensatorisches Konzept: Die Ausländerpädagogik2 Emanzipatorisches Konzept: Der Anspruch der interkulturellen Erziehung; 3 Partizipatives Konzept: Diversity; 4 Interkulturelle Kompetenz - die Wirklichkeit; 5 Partizipativ + Emanzipatorisch = Chance auf Interkulturalität; 1.5 Migrantenorganisationen als Motoren der Integrationsarbeit; 1 Relevanz von Selbstorganisationen; 2 Migrantenorganisationen als politische Vertretung; 3 Migrantenorganisationen als Träger sozialer Projekte; 4 Kompetenz und Vernetzung - das soziale Kapital von Migranten-organisationen
    Abstract: 5 Weiterbildungsbedarfe von Migrantenorganisationen und die Grenzen von Weiterbildung5.1 Angebote und Träger; 5.2 Migrantenorganisationen als Träger von Weiterbildung; 5.3 Tandemprojekte zur Qualifizierung von Migrantenorganisationen; 5.4 Qualitätsstandards in der Weiterbildung von und für Migrantenorganisationen; 6 Schlussbetrachtung: Migrantenorganisationen und die interkulturelle Öffnung der Gesellschaft; Teil B Aktivierung von Migrantinnen und Migranten in Theorie und Praxis; 2.1 Frühkindliche Bildung; 2.1.1 Frühkindliche Bildung; 1 Einleitung
    Abstract: 2 Ein Blick zurück: Interkulturelle Pädagogik und Frühpädagogik
    Abstract: Deutsche mit Migrationshintergrund und Migrantinnen und Migranten aus verschiedenen Landern sind Realitat geworden in unserer Gesellschaft. Gleichzeitig mussen wir jedoch auch feststellen, dass gesellschaftliche Teilhabe und Chancengleichheit fur diese Menschen nicht vorhanden ist. Mit der Anerkennung des Einwanderungslandes Deutschland und der Tatsache der Benachteiligung werfen sich nun Fragen auf. Wie konnen Benachteiligungen abgebaut werden Was kann die deutsche Mehrheitsgesellschaft tun und was konnen die Minderheiten tun Wie kann ein Gleichgewicht hergestellt werden Welche Maßnahmen muss
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 22
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Quartiersforschung : Zwischen Theorie und Praxis (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531199634
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (380 Seiten)
    Edition: 2. Auflage
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Quartiersforschung
    DDC: 307.76072
    RVK:
    RB 10627
    RVK:
    MS 1810
    Keywords: Adaptation, Psychological ; Social ecology ; Social history - 20th century ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Stadtviertel ; Stadtforschung
    Abstract: Inhaltsverzeichnis; Einführung zur zweiten Auflage und Zusammenfassung der Beiträge; Die Beiträge im Überblick; I Überblick; Quartiersforschung im Überblick: Konzepte, Definitionen und aktuelle Perspektiven; 1 Unterwegs in dynamischen Mikrowelten; 2 Acht Portale zum Quartier; 2.1 Sozialökologie: Quartiere zwischen Zyklizität und Homöostase; 2.3 Housing Demography - Quartiere als Orte von Bevölkerungsbewegungen; 2.4 Soziographie - holistische Quartiersbetrachtung; 2.5 Nachbarschaft - von Subkulturalität, Lebenswelten und Aktionsräumen
    Abstract: 2.6 Urban Governance und professionelle Akteure im Quartier2.7 (Neo-)Marxistisch orientierte Theorieansätze: Produktion und Regulation des Quartiers; 2.8 Neuere Raumtheoretische Ansätze und Poststrukturalismus: Quartierskonstruktion und Quartiersdekonstruktion; 3 Definitionen? Abgrenzungen? Die Ambivalenz von realer Komplexität und notwendiger Vereinfachung; 3.1 Begriffsverwendung und Definitionen von „Quartier"; 3.2 Muss man ein „Quartier" abgrenzen können? Und: wie?; 3.3 Versuch einer Re-Definition von Quartier als „Fuzzy Concept"; 4 Fazit: Wozu „Quartiersforschung"?; Literatur
    Abstract: II Theoretische Perspektiven auf das QuartierStadt der Quartiere? Das Place-Konzept und die Idee von urbanen Dörfern; 1 Eckpunkte des Place-Konzeptes im Kontext der Quartiersforschung; 1.1 Zur symbolischen Dimension von Place; 1.2 Zur sozialen Dimension von Place; 1.3 Zur physischen Dimension von Place; 2 Place-Studien: Das Beispiel ‚Urbane Dörfer' und weitere Felder der empirischen Praxis; 3 Die Stadt der Quartiere als Summe urbaner Dörfer?; 4 Das Place-Konzept in der Quartiersforschung - eine Evaluation; Literatur
    Abstract: Die Metapher vom Raum als soziale Landschaft: Perspektiven zur Überwindung der Dichotomie von Quartierkonzeptionen1 Das Quartier in der klassischen Stadtforschung; 2 Relativistische Ansätze inner- und ausserhalb des absolutistischen Raumverständnisses; 3 Die Metapher des Raums als soziale Landschaften; 4 Junge Erwachsene in der Stadt Basel: empirische Annäherung an das Konzept der sozialen Landschaften; 4.1 Landschaftstyp: Transnationale soziale Netzwerke und der Rückzug in der segregierten Stadt
    Abstract: 4.2 Landschaftstyp: Lokale Netzwerke und Orte gemeinsamer Alltagskultur in der sozialpädagogischen Stadt5 Fazit; Literatur; Quartier als Landschaft? Eine Exploration am Beispiel des Wandels in Berlin-Moabit; 1 Das Quartier als Landschaft; 2 Das Fallbeispiel Berlin-Moabit: Quartiersensembles als Landschaften des sozialen Wandels; 3 Vormoderne: Moabit als quasi-natürliche Antithese zur Stadt; 4 Frühmoderne: Moabit als dynamische Industrielandschaft; 5 Einschnitte: Trümmerlandschaften; 6 Hochmoderne: Multikulturelle Arbeiter- und Justizlandschaft
    Abstract: 7 Postmoderne: Moabit als fragmentierte Investitions- und Desinvestitionslandschaft
    Abstract: Wohnviertel, Stadtquartiere, Kieze: Für BewohnerInnen sind sie nicht mehr und nicht weniger als die lokale Verankerung in der (Groß)stadt und der globalisierten Welt. In der Wissenschaft existieren inzwischen vielfältige Diskurse über den lokalen Nahraum. Ebenso wichtig ist das Quartier als strategische Planungskategorie: Es hat als Meso-Level zwischen Stadt und Individualebene in den letzten Jahren geradezu Karriere gemacht - im Rahmen von Stadtentwicklungsprogrammen ebenso wie in der Wohnungswirtschaft. Mit dem Ziel, einen vertieften Dialog anzustoßen, zeigen die AutorInnen dieser aktualisie
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 23
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Ulrich Beck : Pioneer in Cosmopolitan Sociology and Risk Society (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783319049908
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 online resource (201 p.))
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: SpringerBriefs on Pioneers in Science and Practice
    Series Statement: EBL-Schweitzer
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Ulrich Beck
    DDC: 302.12
    RVK:
    LB 27015
    RVK:
    MS 1190
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Preface; Contents; Part I Ulrich Beck; 1 Ulrich Beck's Scientific Leadership Profile; 2 Ulrich Beck: An Introduction to the Theory of Second Modernity and the Risk Society; 2.1…Introduction and a Short Biography; 2.2…From Slupsk to Sociological World Fame: A Short Biography; 3 Bibliography; 3.1…Books (in Chronological Order); 3.2…Book Chapters (in Reverse Chronological Order); 3.3…Journal Articles (in Reverse Chronological Order); Part II Ulrich Beck's Work in the Perspective of Colleagues; 4 The Risk Society Thesis in Environmental Politics and Management: A Global Perspective; Epilogue
    Abstract: References5 Reflexive Modernization; References; 6 The Reality of Cosmopolitanism; 7 Jerusalem Versus Athens Revisited; References; Part III Selected Key Texts by Ulrich Beck; 8 Incalculable Futures: World Risk Society and Its Social and Political Implications; 8.1…Old Dangers, New Risks: Conceptual Differentiation, Historical Localization; 8.1.1 Conceptual Distinctions; 8.1.2 Historical Contextualization; 8.2…What is Meant by the 'Cosmopolitan Moment'?; Bibliography and References; 9 Individualization is Eroding Traditions Worldwide: A Comparison Between Europe and China
    Abstract: 9.1…On the Distinction Between Individualism and Individualization9.2…Individualization and Social Morality; 9.3…Chinese Individualization; References; 10 Beyond Class and Nation: Reframing Social Inequalities in a Globalizing World; 10.1…Introduction; 10.2…''What Exactly Constitutes Individualization and to What Extent has it Really Displaced Class?''; 10.2.1 What Does Individualization Mean Empirically?; 10.2.2 Beyond the Normal Family and Normal Class; 10.3…The Transnationalization of Social Inequalities; 10.3.1 Critique of Methodological Nationalism; 10.3.2 Politics of Framing
    Abstract: 10.4…The Inequality of Global Risks10.5…Pan-European Inequalities; 10.6…Border Artistes: Agency, Legitimacy and Immigrant Dynamics; 10.7…Prospect: The 'Modernity Dispute' in International Sociology; References; 11 The Two Faces of Religion; References; 12 The Global Chaos of Love: Towards a Cosmopolitan Turn in the Sociology of Love and Families; 12.1…Cosmopolitan Families: Characteristics and Constellations; 12.2…Cosmopolitan Theory; 12.3…The Rise of a Transnational Shadow Economy; 12.3.1 The Stalled Revolution; 12.3.2 From Mother's Task to Migrants' Job; 12.3.3 By Silent Agreement
    Abstract: 12.4…Transnational Motherhood and Global Care Chains12.4.1 A Global Hierarchy of Care; 12.5…Loss and Gain: Cosmopolitan Comparisons; 12.5.1 Seeing with the Eyes of the Respective 'Other'; 12.6…Conclusions; References; 13 Reframing Power in the Globalized World; References; 14 We Do Not Live in an Age of Cosmopolitanism but in an Age of Cosmopolitization: The 'Global Other' is in Our Midst; 14.1…Critique of Methodological Nationalism; 14.2…How to Research 'Really Existing Cosmopolitization'?; 14.2.1 Cuisine; 14.2.2 Migration; 14.2.3 Work and Workers; 14.2.4 Love; 14.2.5 Kidneys
    Abstract: 14.2.6 Villages
    Abstract: This book presents Ulrich Beck, one of the world's leading sociologists and social thinkers, as a Pioneer in Cosmopolitan Sociology and Risk Society. His world risk society theory has been confirmed by recent disasters ? events that have shaken modern society to the core, signaling the end of an era in which comprehensive insurance could keep us safe. Due to its own successes, modern society now faces failure: while in the past experiments were conducted in a lab, now the whole world is a test bed. Whether nuclear plants, genetically modified organisms, nanotechnology ? if any of these experim
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
  • 24
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The common good : Chinese and American perspectives (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400772724
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 online resource (292 pages) , illustrations.
    Series Statement: Philosophical Studies in Contemporary Culture 23
    RVK:
    CI 9130
    Keywords: Philosophy, Modern ; Political science ; Philosophy ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Konferenzschrift
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index. Description based on online resource; title from PDF title page (ebrary, viewed December 16, 2013)
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 25
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Beneficial Ownership : Basic and Federal Indian Law Aspects of a Concept (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783319016863
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXIX, 151 p. 8 illus, online resource)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Reinhard-DeRoo, Matthias Beneficial ownership
    RVK:
    PP 8675
    Keywords: Humanities ; Anthropology ; Law ; Law ; Humanities ; Anthropology
    Abstract: The hunt for beneficial owners is on. Like an elephant, the beneficial owner hides in the jungle of complex legal structures, waiting to be discovered by eager prosecutors. But what lies behind this metaphor? What is a Beneficial Owner? Is beneficial ownership a right? What does this right encompass? What is the value of this right compared to other rights? And if beneficial ownership is not a right, is it still a legally relevant relation? How do courts, namely the U.S. Supreme Court deal with the concept? When do Anglo-American judges and European scholars resort to the concept? This book approaches these questions from two perspectives: legal fundamentals and the field of U.S. federal Indian law. Both legal theories and case law are scrutinized with the aim to find a better understanding of the basic conception and characteristics of beneficial ownership. Federal Indian law has been chosen for the study of the concrete implications of the beneficial ownership concept in what Roscoe Pound referred to as “the law in action.” To some, this choice of legal field might seem somewhat unusual. What answers could federal Indian law possibly offer with regard to pressing questions from the financial industry? As always, there is a short and a long answer. The short answer is that the analysis of an equally sophisticated field of law can open new perspectives on a given field of law. For example, not only potential criminals and tax evaders but also members of an older civilization are beneficial owners. The long answer can be found in this very book
    Description / Table of Contents: IntroductionThe Term Beneficial Ownership -- Beneficial Ownership as a Concept -- Common Law, Equity and Beneficial Ownership -- Beneficial Ownership Used in U.S. Supreme Court Decisions -- Fundamental Aspects of Federal Indian Law -- The Beneficial Ownership Concept Applied in Federal Indian Law -- Epilogue.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references
    DOI: 10.1007/978-3-319-01686-3
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 26
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Machines of Sex Research : Technology and the Politics of Identity, 1945-1985 (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400770638
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (104 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Springerbriefs in History of Science and Technology
    Series Statement: SpringerBriefs in History of Science and Technology Ser.
    Parallel Title: Print version The Machines of Sex Research : Technology and the Politics of Identity, 1945-1985
    DDC: 306.7072
    Keywords: Sexology ; Research ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: The Machines of Sex Research describes how researchers worldwide integrated technology into studies of human sexuality in the postwar era. The machines they invented made new ways of seeing bodies possible. Some researchers who studied men used machines like penile strain gauges to police ""deviant"" male sexuality; others used less painful devices like penis-cameras to study women's sexual responses and map the physiology of their arousal and orgasm. While researchers used the findings from their technological innovations to propose their own views of how people should view their bodies and s
    Description / Table of Contents: Acknowledgments; Contents; 1 The Machines of Sex Research; Abstract; Chapter Overview; Theoretical Background; Historical Background; References; 2 The Penile Strain Gauge and Aversion Therapy: Measuring and Fixing the Sexual Body; Abstract; Historical Background; The Sex Research Laboratory; Aversion Therapy; Resistance; Conclusion; 3 The Couples Laboratory and the Penis-Camera: Seeking the Source of Orgasm; Abstract; The Visible Body in the Laboratory; What the Machines Discovered about the Sexual Body; Criticizing the Mechanization of Sexuality; Conclusion; References
    Description / Table of Contents: 4 The Vaginal Photoplethysmograph and Devices for Women: Gauging Female ArousalAbstract; Measure for Measure: Inventing Machines for Female Sexual Response; The Vaginal Photoplethysmograph, the Labial Clip, and the Thermograph; Conclusion; References; 5 Conclusion: The Future of Human Sex Research Technologies; Abstract; References
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 27
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Understanding Society and Natural Resources : Forging New Strands of Integration Across the Social Sciences (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789401789592
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXV, 261 p. 38 illus., 2 illus. in color, online resource)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    Keywords: Ecology ; Environmental geology. ; Geoecology. ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Human Geography ; Physical geography.
    Abstract: In this edited volume leading scholars from different disciplinary backgrounds wrestle with social science integration opportunities and challenges. This book explores the growing concern of how best to achieve effective integration of the social science disciplines as a means for furthering natural resource social science and environmental problem solving. The chapters provide an overview of the history, vision, advances, examples, and methods that could lead to integration. The quest for integration among the social sciences is not new. Some argue that the social sciences have lagged in their advancements and contributions to society due to their inability to address integration related issues. Integration merits debate for a number of reasons. First, natural resource issues are complex and are affected by multiple proximate driving social factors. Single disciplinary studies focused at one level are unlikely to provide explanations that represent this complexity and are limited in their ability to inform policy recommendations. Complex problems are best explored across disciplines that examine social-ecological phenomenon from different scales. Second, multi-disciplinary initiatives such as those with physical and biological scientists are necessary to understand the scope of the social sciences. Too frequently there is a belief that one social scientist on a multi-disciplinary team provides adequate social science representation. Third, more complete models of human behavior will be achieved through a synthesis of diverse social science perspectives
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-017-8959-2
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (kostenfrei)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 28
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Perspectives on theory of controversies and the ethics of communication : explorations of Marcelo Dascal's contributions to philosophy (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400771314
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 online resource (222 pages) , illustrations.
    Series Statement: Logic, Argumentation & Reasoning, Interdisciplinary Perspectives from the Humanities and Social Sciences 2
    DDC: 149.94
    Keywords: Linguistics ; Philosophy ; Philosophy ; Political science ; Philosophy ; Electronic books
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index. Description based on online resource; title from PDF title page (ebrary, viewed January 2, 2014)
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 29
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbook of Child Maltreatment (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400772076 , 9789400772083
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXVI, 588 p. 17 illus., 11 illus. in color, online resource)
    DDC: 306
    Keywords: Sozialwissenschaften ; Social sciences ; Quality of Life ; Quality of Life / Research ; Developmental psychology ; Social Sciences ; Kindesmisshandlung ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Kindesmisshandlung
    Note: Child Maltreatment, Contemporary Issues in Research and Policy ; 2
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-7208-3
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    München UB
    Würzburg UB
    BVB
  • 30
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Modelling Norms (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400770522
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 213 p. 33 illus, online resource)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Elsenbroich, Corinna Modelling norms
    DDC: 306
    RVK:
    MR 7300
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Computer simulation ; Social sciences Data processing ; Criminology ; Social sciences Methodology ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Computer simulation ; Social sciences Data processing ; Criminology ; Social sciences Methodology ; Modellierung ; Methode ; Online-Ressource ; Soziale Norm ; Kriminalitätstheorie ; Modellierung
    Abstract: The book focusses on questions of individual and collective action, the emergence and dynamics of social norms and the feedback between individual behaviour and social phenomena. It discusses traditional modelling approaches to social norms and shows the usefulness of agent-based modelling for the study of these micro-macro interactions. Existing agent-based models of social norms are discussed and it is shown that so far too much priority has been given to parsimonious models and questions of the emergence of norms, with many aspects of social norms, such as norm-change, not being modelled. Juvenile delinquency, group radicalisation and moral decision making are used as case studies for agent-based models of collective action extending existing models by providing an embedding into social networks, social influence via argumentation and a causal action theory of moral decision making. The major contribution of the book is to highlight the multifaceted nature of the dynamics of social norms, consisting not only of emergence, and the importance of embedding of agent-based models into existing theory.
    Description / Table of Contents: IntroductionTheorising Norms -- Theorising Crime -- Agent-based Modelling -- The Environment and Social Norms -- Punishment and Social Norms -- Imitation and Social Norms -- Socially Situated Social Norms -- Internalisation and Social Norms -- Modelling Norms -- Delinquent Networks -- Social Construction of Knowledge -- Morality -- We-Intentionality -- Conclusion -- Index.
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-7052-2
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    HeBIS
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 31
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Encyclopedia of Food and Agricultural Ethics (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400709294
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXXVII, 1860 p. 29 illus., 26 illus. in color. eReference, online resource)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    Keywords: Humanities ; Humanities / Arts ; Ethics ; Philosophy of nature ; Agriculture ; Environmental law ; Landwirtschaft ; Nahrung ; Ethik
    Abstract: This Encyclopedia offers a definitive source on issues pertaining to the full range of topics in the important new area of food and agricultural ethics. It includes summaries of historical approaches, current scholarship, social movements, and new trends from the standpoint of the ethical notions that have shaped them. It combines detailed analyses of specific topics such as the role of antibiotics in animal production, the Green Revolution, and alternative methods of organic farming, with longer entries that summarize general areas of scholarship and explore ways that they are related. Renewed debate, discussion and inquiry into food and agricultural topics have become a hallmark of the turn toward more sustainable policies and lifestyles in the 21st century. Attention has turned to the goals and ethical rationale behind production, distribution and consumption of food, as well as to non-food uses of cultivated biomass and the products of animal husbandry. These wide-ranging debates encompass questions in human nutrition, animal rights and the environmental impacts of aquaculture and agricultural production. Each of these and related topics is both technically complex and involves an - often implicit - ethical dimension. Other topics include methods for integrating ethics into scientific and technical research programs or development projects, the role of intensive agriculture and biotechnology in addressing persistent world hunger and the role of crops, forests and engineered organisms in making a transition to renewable, carbon-neutral sources of energy. The Encyclopedia of Food and Agricultural Ethics proves an indispensible reference point for future research and writing on topics in agriculture and food ethics for decades to come
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-0929-4
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 32
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Air quality management : Canadian perspectives on a global issue (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400775572
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (xii, 408 Seiten)
    Parallel Title: Print version Air Quality Management : Canadian Perspectives on a Global Issue
    DDC: 399
    Keywords: Environmental sciences ; Public health ; Environmental protection ; Air quality management -- Canada ; Electronic books
    Abstract: This book provides a wide overview of the issues related to managing of air quality in Canada. Learn about the air issues that have caused impacts to ecosystems or human health and hence been targeted to be managed. Discover how Canadas national governance involving a federal government along with provincial and territorial governments impacts the air quality management process. Understand how Canadians manage their air quality in context with the USA, their largest and closest neighbour. Benefit from the experience of 43 of Canadas most experienced air quality management professionals who share their insights into the state of air quality in Canada today, how it is managed, as well as giving a glimpse into the future.?
    Description / Table of Contents: part I. Air pollution sciencepart II. Air quality impacts -- part III. Management of emissions -- part Ivolume Policy and planning -- part volume Communicating air quality information.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 33
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Gender, lifespan and quality of life : an international perspective (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400778290
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 online resource (278 pages) , illustrations.
    Series Statement: Social Indicators Research Series 53
    Series Statement: Social Indicators Research Ser. v.53
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als
    DDC: 306
    RVK:
    MS 2900
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Quality of life ; Humanities ; Quality of life -- Research ; Developmental psychology ; Social sciences ; Quality of life ; Humanities ; Quality of life ; Research ; Developmental psychology ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung
    Abstract: This publication will fill a significant gap in the literature on quality of life and subjective wellbeing by addressing the gender dimensions of people's lived experience and emphasizing how gender relationships differentially impact on women's and girls' as well as men's and boys' subjective wellbeing across the lifespan. Sex-disaggregation of data on objective conditions of quality of life is now routinely undertaken in many countries of the world. However, despite the burgeoning of objective data on sex differences in life conditions across the world, very little gender analysis is carried out to explain fully such difference and there is still a serious dearth of data on gender differences in subjective experiences of quality of life and wellbeing. This publication will assist researchers, teachers, service providers and policy makers in filling some of the gaps in currently available literature on the nexus between age and gender in producing differential experiences of subjective wellbeing. The book brings together research which compares female's and male's subjective experiences of wellbeing at various life stages from a variety of countries and regions, particularly focusing on women's subjective wellbeing.
    Abstract: Intro -- Contents -- Contributors -- Chapter-1 -- Gender, Lifespan, Cultural Context and QOL -- References -- Chapter-2 -- Personal Well-being and Interpersonal Communication of 12-16 Year-Old Girls and Their Own Mothers: Gender and Intergenerational Issues -- 2.1 Introduction -- 2.2 Method Procedure and Sample -- 2.2.1 Description of the Variables -- 2.3 Results -- 2.3.1 Activities -- 2.3.2 Conversations -- 2.3.3 Satisfaction -- 2.3.4 Values Aspired to for the Girls' Future -- 2.3.5 Explained Model of Girls' and Mothers' Satisfaction with Life as a Whole -- 2.4 Discussion -- References -- Chapter-3 -- Gender Dimensions of Life Quality for Adults in Australia -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Subjective Wellbeing Homeostasis -- 3.3 Homeostatic Buffers -- 3.4 External Buffers -- 3.5 Internal Buffers -- 3.6 Gender Differences -- 3.7 Method -- 3.8 Results -- 3.8.1 Gender × Survey -- 3.8.2 Personal Wellbeing Domains -- 3.8.3 Domain Stability Across Surveys × Gender -- 3.8.4 Demographic Influences on Gender Differences in SWB -- 3.8.5 Age -- 3.8.6 Living Alone -- 3.8.7 Relationship Status -- 3.8.8 Work Status -- 3.9 Discussion -- 3.9.1 Overall Pattern of Gender Differences -- 3.9.2 Age -- 3.9.3 Living Alone -- 3.9.4 Work Status -- 3.10 Summary -- References -- Chapter-4 -- Chasing the 'Good Life': GenderDifferences in Work Aspirationsof American Men and Women -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Conceptual Framework -- 4.3 Data and Methods -- 4.4 Results -- 4.4.1 Gender Differences in Aspirations and Attainments -- 4.4.1.1 Material Goods -- 4.4.1.2 Good Health -- 4.4.1.3 Family Life -- 4.4.1.4 Work -- 4.4.1.5 Work Aspirations over the Life Course -- 4.5 Summary and Discussion -- References -- Chapter-5 -- Gender Dimensions of Quality of Life in Algeria -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Gender Equalities: The Current Situation.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index. Description based on online resource; title from PDF title page (ebrary, viewed January 12, 2014)
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/978-94-007-7829-0
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: http://ebooks.ciando.com/book/index.cfm?bok_id/1244574
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: http://ebooks.ciando.com/book/index.cfm?bok_id/1244574
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: http://ebooks.ciando.com/book/index.cfm?bok_id/1244574
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    KOBV
    BVB
    HBZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 34
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Moral status of technical artefacts (2014)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400779143
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource (vi, 248 Seiten)
    Series Statement: Philosophy of Engineering and Technology Volume 17
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als The moral status of technical artefacts
    DDC: 303.483
    RVK:
    CC 8700
    Keywords: Technology -- Social aspects ; Engineering design -- Philosophy ; Technology ; Social aspects ; Engineering design ; Philosophy ; Electronic books ; Engineering ; Philosophy ; Philosophy (General) ; Political science ; Technology ; Technik ; Artefakt ; Ethik ; Artefakt ; Ethik ; Technik
    Abstract: This book considers the question: to what extent does it make sense to qualify technical artefacts as moral entities? The authors' contributions trace recent proposals and topics including instrumental and non-instrumental values of artefacts, agency and artefactual agency, values in and around technologies, and the moral significance of technology. The editors' introduction explains that as 'agents' rather than simply passive instruments, technical artefacts may actively influence their users, changing the way they perceive the world, the way they act in the world and the way they interact with each other. This volume features the work of various experts from around the world, representing a variety of positions on the topic. Contributions explore the contested discourse on agency in humans and artefacts, defend the Value Neutrality Thesis by arguing that technological artefacts do not contain, have or exhibit values, or argue that moral agency involves both human and non-human elements.The book also investigates technological fields that are subject to negative moral valuations due to the harmful effects of some of their products. It includes an analysis of some difficulties arising in Artificial Intelligence and an exploration of values in Chemistry and in Engineering. The Moral Status of Technical Artefacts is an advanced exploration of the various dimensions of the relations between technology and morality.
    Abstract: Intro -- Contents -- Chapter 1: Introduction: The Moral Status of Technical Artefacts -- Reference -- Chapter 2: Agency in Humans and in Artifacts: A Contested Discourse -- 2.1 Intentions, Ethics, and Artifacts -- 2.2 Artifacts with Secondary Agency -- 2.3 Artifacts as Delegated Agents -- 2.4 Artifacts and Cultures -- 2.5 Questioning Conclusions -- References -- Chapter 3: Towards a Post-human Intra-actional Account of Sociomaterial Agency (and Morality) -- 3.1 Introduction -- 3.2 Making Sense of Sociomaterial Agency (and Morality) -- 3.2.1 The Inter-actional Human-Centred Account of Sociomaterial Agency -- 3.2.2 The Intra-actional Post-humanist Account of Sociomaterial Agency -- 3.3 Figuring Intra-actional Agency in the Plagiarism Detection Phenomenon -- 3.3.1 'Cutting and Pasting' and the Reconstitution of Writing and Authorship -- 3.3.2 The Emergence of the Phenomenon of Plagiarism -- 3.3.3 'Cutting and Pasting' and the Constitution of the Plagiarist -- 3.3.4 PDS, Education and the Production of Intellectual Property -- 3.4 Intra-actional Agency and Disclosive Ethics -- 3.4.1 Disclosive Archaeology of Phenomena -- 3.4.2 Towards Intra-actional Responsibility -- References -- Chapter 4: Which Came First, the Doer or the Deed? -- 4.1 Introduction -- 4.2 Individualism -- 4.3 A Modernist Frame -- 4.4 Composite Agency -- 4.5 A Postmodernist Frame -- 4.6 Zooming Out -- 4.7 Conclusion -- References -- Chapter 5: Some Misunderstandings About the Moral Significance of Technology -- 5.1 Introduction -- 5.2 Do Artifacts Have Morality? -- 5.3 Do Artifacts Have Agency? -- 5.4 Can Things Have Intentionality? -- 5.5 Can Freedom Be Technologically Mediated? -- 5.6 Conclusion: Is There a Symmetry Between Humans and Technologies? -- References -- Chapter 6: "Guns Don't Kill, People Kill" -- Values in and/or Around Technologies -- 6.1 Introduction.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references at the end of each chapters. Description based on print version record
    DOI: 10.1007/9789400779143
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    KOBV
  • 35
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Soziale Milieus und Wandel der Sozialstruktur : Die gesellschaftlichen Herausforderungen und die Strategien der sozialen Gruppen (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531199467
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (413 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Series Statement: Sozialstrukturanalyse
    Parallel Title: Print version Soziale Milieus und Wandel der Sozialstruktur : Die gesellschaftlichen Herausforderungen und die Strategien der sozialen Gruppen
    DDC: 305
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Soziale, wirtschaftliche und politische Probleme haben sich in den vergangenen Jahren erheblich zugespitzt. Die Akteure sehen sich zunehmend zu Eigenverantwortung und Flexibilität im Erwerbs- und Bildungsbereich gefordert. Betroffen sind längst nicht mehr nur die unterprivilegierten sozialen Milieus. Deklassierungsängste erreichen inzwischen weite Teile der bislang gesicherten gesellschaftlichen Mitte. Der Band versammelt Beiträge, die die Entwicklungen und Umstellungen mit dem vieldiskutierten Konzept der sozialen Milieus untersuchen. Dieser Ansatz, der sowohl den Fortbestand sozialer Klassen
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort zur 2. Auflage; Inhaltsverzeichnis; EINFÜHRUNG; Zur Entwicklung des Konzeptes sozialer Milieus und Mentalitäten; 1. Besonderheiten der typenbildenden Mentalitäts- und Milieuanalyse; 2. Entwicklungswege und Forschungsschwerpunkte; 3. Zum Aufbau und zu den Beiträgen des Bandes; Literatur; Klasse und Milieu als Bedingungen gesellschaftlich-politischen Handelns*; 1. Zur Problemstellung; 2. Klassen und Klassenbewusstsein; 2.1 Die Arbeiterklasse als „revolutionäres Subjekt": Marx und der Marxismus; 2.2 Die Klassen im Kampf um die Führung der Nation: Max Weber
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3 Von der Klassenlage zum politischen Bewusstsein: Die Rolle der Mentalitäten2.4 Die Entstehung von Klassen als historischer Lernprozess; 3. Politische Orientierung und gesellschaftliche Milieus; 3.1 Politische „Lager" und „sozialmoralische Milieus"; 3.2 Milieupartei und Volkspartei; 3.3 Ein Milieu - mehrere Lager: Das Ruhrrevier; 3.4 Organisierte politisch-soziale Milieus: Aufbau und Untergang sozialistischer „Hochburgen" in Sachsen; 4. „Jenseits von Stand und Klasse". Milieus in der „pluralisierten Klassengesellschaft"
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.1 Klassengesellschaft ohne Klassen. Die Milieukategorie in der neueren Sozialstrukturforschung4.2 Lebensstilmilieus als Rahmenbedingungen gesellschaftlichen Verhaltens; 4.3 Der Wandel der Sozialstruktur und die Entstehung neuer gesellschaftlich-politischer Milieus15; Literatur; DIAGNOSEN UND PERSPEKTIVEN; Soziale Milieus und die Ambivalenzen der Informations- undWissensgesellschaft; 1. Auf dem Weg zur „Lebensstilgesellschaft"; 2. Wissens-, Informations- und Netzwerkgesellschaft; 3. Konturen einer neuen „Klassenstruktur" in der Informationsgesellschaft
    Description / Table of Contents: 4. „Neue" Ungleichheiten in der Informations- und Wissensgesellschaft5. Paradoxien der Kommunikation und Ambivalenzen des Wissens; 6. Ungleichheiten durch „reflexives" Wissen; 7. Soziale Milieus und Lebensstile in der Wissensgesellschaft; Literatur; „Natürlich gibt es heute noch Schichten!" - Bilderder modernen Sozialstruktur in den Köpfen der Menschen; 1. Alltagserkennen und wissenschaftliches Erkennen; 2. Methode; 3. Das dominierende Bild in den Köpfen der sozialen Akteure - die geschichtete Gesellschaft
    Description / Table of Contents: 4. Fließende Übergänge - offizielle und inoffizielle Strukturen - zunehmende Polarisierung5. Schicht-Schemata; 6. Schichtkriterien; 7. Selbsteinstufung; 8. Bilanz: Vertikal-pluraler Doppelblick; Literatur; Die Metamorphosen der sozialen Frage in Zeiten desneuen Geistes des Kapitalismus; 1. Reflexive Kapitalismuskritik; 2. Im Treibhaus unternehmerischer Vernunft; 3. Menschen im Mahlstrom entfesselter Marktkonkurrenz; 4. Ein nicht wieder zu erkennendes Unternehmen; 5. Ein Ethos für „Herrenmenschen"; 6. Die neue Verwundbarkeit diesseits der sozialen Sicherungen; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Folgen gesellschaftlicher Entsolidarisierung
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 36
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Lexikon der soziologischen Werke (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658023775
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (823 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Parallel Title: Print version Lexikon der soziologischen Werke
    DDC: 301
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Dieses Lexikon liefert einen Überblick über die wichtigsten Werke der Soziologie. Es dokumentiert auf eine einzigartige Weise sowohl die Geschichte der Soziologie als auch ihre aktuellen Ansätze. 800 Bücher werden von 185 Rezensenten präzise dargestellt, so dass der Leser sich sehr schnell über Inhalt und Relevanz eines Werkes informieren kann. Es werden auch Klassiker aus der Ethnologie, Psychologie, Philosophie, Ökonomie und Politikwissenschaft besprochen, sofern diese Werke eine Relevanz für die Soziologie haben. Dieses Nachschlagewerk hat sich im neuen Jahrtausend zu einem führenden Handbu
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhaltsverzeichnis; Vorwort; Vorwort Vorwort der Zweitauflage von 2013; Vorwort der Erstauflage von 2001; Abel, Wilhelm; Abendroth, Wolfgang; Acham, Karl; Acquaviva, Sabino Samale; Adorno, Theodor W.; Adorno, Theodor W.; Adorno, Theodor W.; Else Frenkel-Brunswik; Daniel J. Levinson; R. Nevitt Sanford; Alber, Jens; Albert, Hans; Alemann, Ulrich von; Heinze, Rolf G.; Alexander, Jeffrey C.; Alexander, Jeffrey; Allport, Gordon W.; Anders, Günther; Arendt, Hannah; Argyle, Michael; Argyle, Michael; Henderson, Monica; Aristoteles; Aron, Raymond; Arrow, Kenneth; Augustinus, Aurelius; Axelrod, Robert
    Description / Table of Contents: Baader, Franz vonBachofen, Johann Jacob; Bachrach, Peter; Backes, Gertrud M.; Clemens, Wolfgang; Baethge, Martin; Oberbeck, Herbert; Bahrdt, Hans-Paul; Bahrdt, Hans-Paul; Bandura, Albert; Bandura, Albert; Banfield, Edward Christie; Baran, Paul A.; Sweezy, Paul M.; Barthes, Roland; Bartlett, Sir Frederick Charles; Bastian, Adolf; Bateson, Gregory; Margaret Mead; Beauvoir, Simone de; Beauvoir, Simone de; Beck, Ulrich; Beck, Ulrich; Beck-Gernsheim, Elisabeth; Becker, Gary Stanley; Becker, Howard S.; Beckford, James A.; Behrendt, Richard Fritz; Bell, Daniel; Bellah, Robert N.
    Description / Table of Contents: Richard Madsen, William M. Sullivan, Ann Swidler, Steven M. TiptonBendix, Reinhard; Bendix, Reinhard; Bendix, Reinhard; Benedict, Ruth; Benedict, Ruth; Berger, Johannes; Berger, Peter Ludwig; Luckmann,Thomas; Bernstein, Basil; Bertalanffy, Ludwig von; Beyme, Klaus von; Blau, Peter Michael; Blau, Peter Michael; Blau, Peter Michael; Blauner, Robert; Bloch, Ernst; Bloch, Marc; Bloch, Marc; Blumer, Herbert; Boas, Franz; Boas, Franz; Böhle, Fritz; Rose, Helmuth; Boltanski, Luc; Chiapello, Ève; Boltanski, Luc; Thévenot, Laurent; Booth, Charles; Borkenau, Franz; Borkenau, Franz; Boserup, Ester
    Description / Table of Contents: Boserup, EstherBosl, Karl; Boudon, Raymond; Boulding, Kenneth Ewart; Bourdieu, Pierre; Bourdieu, Pierre; Bovet, Pierre; Bowlby, John; Boyden, Stephen; Bracher, Karl Dietrich; Braudel, Fernand; Braverman, Harry; Breuer, Stefan; Briefs, Goetz; Brinton, Crane; Bronfenbrenner, Urie; Brüggemann, Beate; Riehle, Rainer; Brunner, Otto; Buchanan, James M.; Buchanan, James M.; Tullock, G.; Bühl, Walter Ludwig; Burnham, James; Campanella, Tommaso Giovanni Domenico; Canetti, Elias; Caplow, Theodore; Carr-Saunders, Sir Alexander Morris; Cassirer, Ernst; Cassirer, Ernst; Cassirer, Ernst; Castells, Manuel
    Description / Table of Contents: Castoriadis, CorneliusCavalli-Sforza, Luigi Luca; Cavalli-Sforza, Francesco; Chagnon, Napoleon Alphonseau; Chalasinski, Józef; Child, Irvin Long; Whiting, John Wesley Mayhew; Childe, V. Gordon; Cicourel, Aaron V.; Cicourel, Aaron V.; Claessens, Dieter; Klönne, Arno; Tschoepe, Armin; Claessens, Dieter; Clark, Colin Grant; Clastres, Pierre; Clausewitz, Carl von; Cloward, Richard A.; Ohlin, Lloyd E.; Cohen, Albert K.; Cohen, Daniel; Cohen, Mark N.; Cole, Michael; Scribner, Sylvia; Coleman, James S.; Coleman, James S.; Collins, Randall; Collins, Randall; Collins, Randall; Comte, Auguste
    Description / Table of Contents: Cooley, Charles Horton
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 37
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Medienkommunikation in Bewegung : Mobilisierung †Mobile Medien †Kommunikative Mobilität (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531193748
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (309 p)
    Series Statement: Medien - Kultur - Kommunikation
    Parallel Title: Print version Medienkommunikation in Bewegung : Mobilisierung – Mobile Medien – Kommunikative Mobilität
    DDC: 302.2
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: ????In heutigen Gesellschaften stehen soziale, informationelle und räumliche Mobilität und digitale Kommunikationsmedien in einem engen Zusammenhang. Medien werden dabei nicht nur immer mobiler, sondern die Menschen verwenden sie auch zunehmend zum Zwecke kommunikativer Mobilität. Die vielfältigen Dimensionen individueller wie gesellschaftlicher Mobilitäts- und Mobilisierungsprozesse werden aus einer kommunikations- und mediensoziologischen Perspektive sowohl theoretisch als auch empirisch verortet. Dabei werden die Erträge bisheriger Forschungsansätze kritisch reflektiert und ein Blick
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhaltsverzeichnis; Einleitung; Mobilisierung, mobile Medien und kommunikative Mobilität aus kommunikations- und mediensoziologischer Perspektive; 1 Einleitung; 2 Begriffskritik; 3 Aktuelle Debatten; 4 Mobilkommunikation und -medien als Forschungsthemen: Die Beiträge dieses Buchs; Literatur; Theorien kommunikativer und medialer Mobilität; Doing Mobility. Menschen in Bewegung, Aktivitätsmuster, Zwischenräume und mobile Kommunikation; 1 Mobile Menschen und mobile Medien; 2 Öffentliche Räume und Menschen in Bewegung; 3 Mediennutzungen, Aktivitätsmuster und Zwischenräume
    Description / Table of Contents: 4 Schlussbemerkungen: Medienrahmen und Kommunikation im öffentlichen RaumLiteratur; Mediatisierung, Mobilisierung und Individualisierung als Theorieansätze kommunikativer Mobilität; 1 Einleitung; 2 Mediatisierung; 3 Mobilisierung; 4 Individualisierung; 5 Mediatisierung, Mobilisierung und Individualisierung als Theorierahmen für Medienkommunikation und Mobilität; 5.1 Mediatisierung und Mobilisierung; 5.2 Mobilisierung und Individualisierung; 5.3 Mediatisierung und Individualisierung; 6 Kommunikative Mobilität als Forschungsperspektive auf Medien und Mobilität; 7 Fazit; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Wandel von Öffentlichkeit und RaumbezügenMobilisiert-mediatisierte Lebenswelten und der Wandel des öffentlichen Raums; 1 Einleitung; 2 Mobilisiert-mediatisierte Lebenswelten; 3 Multilokalität als Alltagspraxis; 4 Zum Wandel des öffentlichen Raums; 5 Versuch einer Theoretisierung von Öffentlichkeitspraktiken im Wandel; 6 Fazit: Öffentlichkeitsanbindungen in mobilisiert-mediatisierten Lebenswelten; Literatur; Räume und Kontexte öffentlicher Kommunikation; 1 Einleitung; 2 Raumtheoretische Grundlegungen für kommunikationswissenschaftlicheÖffentlichkeitsstudien
    Description / Table of Contents: 3 Institutionalisierung und Koppelung von Raum und Öffentlichkeit4 Veränderungen der öffentlichen Kommunikation: Innovationen und Problemdruck; 5 Conclusio; Literatur; Wo bist du? Der geographische Raum im Zeitalter mobiler Kommunikationsmedien; 1 Einleitung: Mobilität und die Frage der Verortung; 2 Räumliche Bezüge und mobile Medien; 3 Methodische Anlage der Studie; 4 Forschungsergebnisse; 4.1 Nutzungs- und Verortungsweisen von mobilen Kommunikationsmedien; 4.2 Mobilkommunikation und Bewegung im Raum; 4.3 Individuelles Verhältnis zum geographischen Raum
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.4 Gewandeltes Raumverständnis durch mobile Mediennutzung5 Fazit und Ausblick; Literatur; Wandel von sozialen Beziehungen und Vergemeinschaftungen; Mediennutzer als mobile kommunikative Inseln. Ergebnisse eines qualitativen Experiments; 1 Vom stationären Rezipienten zum mobilen Mediennutzer; 2 Konsequenzen der mobilen Mediennutzung: Inattentional Blindness (IB); 3 „Haben Sie den Clown gesehen?" - Ergebnisse eines qualitativen Experiments; 4 Weiterführende Forschungsnotwendigkeiten: Mediennutzer als mobile kommunikative Inseln; 4.1 Soziale Arrangements im öffentlichen Raum
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2 Medien und ihre Nutzungskontexte: Art und Abstufung der Aufmerksamkeit
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 38
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    After Work Balance : Die Zeit danach (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658044213
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (41 p)
    Series Statement: essentials
    Parallel Title: Print version After Work Balance : Die Zeit danach
    DDC: 304.6
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Wir werden immer älter, und viele Menschen sind beim Eintritt in den Ruhestand noch fit und möchten eine Tätigkeit ausüben, die ihnen Freude bereitet und für andere Nutzen stiftet. Dietmar Goldammer klärt auf, regt an und mobilisiert
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort; Inhaltsverzeichnis; Kapitel 1; Einleitung; Kapitel 2; Was heißt eigentlich alt?; Kapitel 3; Die neue Arbeitswelt; Kapitel 4; Gewohnheiten im Alter; Kapitel 5; Ein Plan für das Alter; Kapitel 6; Das Netzwerk für den Ruhestand; Kapitel 7; Die individuelle Ausgangssituation; Kapitel 8; Die Verabschiedung; Kapitel 9; Angst vor dem Älter-Werden; Kapitel 10; Rückblick auf ein erfülltes Leben; Kapitel 11; Muss man Muße wieder lernen?; Kapitel 12; Verändert sich das Zusammenleben in der Partnerschaft?; Kapitel 13; Was kann ich besser als andere?; Kapitel 14
    Description / Table of Contents: Kann ich noch einmal etwas Neues anfangen?Kapitel 15; Standortüberlegungen; Kapitel 16; Welche Sportarten gibt es für Senioren?; Kapitel 17; Anregungen zur aktiven Gestaltung der Freizeit; Kapitel 18; Senioren und die Politik; Kapitel 19; Welche Vergünstigungen kann man als Senior nutzen?; Kapitel 20; Beispiele für Tätigkeiten der Senioren; Kapitel 21; Der Senioren-Service großer Städte (Beispiel Düsseldorf); Kapitel 22; Noch ein paar Statements; Kapitel 23; Die Perspektiven der Älteren
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 39
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Der Zerfall des Publikums : Nachrichtennutzung zwischen Zeitung und Internet (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658036454
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (297 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Parallel Title: Print version Der Zerfall des Publikums : Nachrichtennutzung zwischen Zeitung und Internet
    DDC: 301
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: ​Übersicht über den Nachrichtenwandel von der Zeitung zum Internet: Aufriss, Analyse, zukünftige Entwicklung〈br〉Neue empirische Studie mit exklusiven Befunden〈br〉Konsequenzen für die Praxis mit Empfehlungen für die Zukunft
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort des Herausgebers; Vorwort; Inhaltsübersicht; Inhaltsverzeichnis; Abbildungsverzeichnis; Tabellenverzeichnis; Abkürzungsverzeichnis; 1. Die Tageszeitung unter Druck; 1.1 Strukturkrise statt Werbeflaute; 1.1.1 Auflagenschwund und schrumpfende Vielfalt; 1.1.2 Wegbleibende Kohorten; 1.1.3 Verluste in allen Bildungsgruppen; 1.1.4 Sinkende Reichweiten; 1.2 Warum die Leser fehlen; 1.2.1 Bei der Zeitung sinkt die Nutzungsdauer; 1.2.2 Onlineavantgarde und Verzichtende; 1.2.3 Neue Motive gegenüber neuen Medien; 1.2.4 Das Image der Tageszeitung; 1.2.5 Junge Leser haben sich abgewandt
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.3 Zeitungsverlage und neue Medien1.3.1 Die Verlage investieren ins Internet; 1.3.2 Weblogs, Podcasts, Videoblogs; 1.3.3 Nutzerbeteiligung durch neue Medien; 1.3.4 Ökonomische Crossmedia-Strategien; 1.3.5 Journalistische Angebote sind im Netz nachrangig; 1.4 Wer in Zukunft noch liest; 1.4.1 Der Durchschnittsleser; 1.4.2 Geschlechterspezifische Unterschiede; 1.4.3 Qualitätszeitungen entbehrlich für Hochgebildete; 1.4.4 Boulevardpresse bleibt stabil; 1.4.5 Die Nutzer ändern ihr Verhalten; 1.4.6 Das Interesse am eigenen Umfeld; 1.4.7 Die Vorlieben der jungen Generation; 2. Die Leser im Wandel
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1 Fragmentierung, Crossmedia und Konvergenz2.1.1 Der Zerfall des Publikums; 2.1.2 Konvergenz und Verzahnung; 2.1.3 Medienübergreifende Nutzungsmuster; 2.1.4 Transmediale Nutzungsstile; 2.1.5 Rezeptionsmodalitäten; 2.1.6 Ersatz oder Ergänzung?; 2.2 Alte und neue Bedürfnisse der Nutzer; 2.2.1 Die Israel-Studie und ihre Nachfolger; 2.2.2 Unbewusste Navigation durch Erregung und Neugier; 2.2.3 Medienroutinen durch Urteilsheuristiken und Schemata; 2.2.4 Stimmungsabhängige Mediennutzung; 2.2.5 Exkurs: Nutzen in der Mikroökonomie; 2.3 Mediennutzung als Ausdrucksform; 2.3.1 Von Schichten zu Milieus
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.2 Die Erlebnisgesellschaft und ihre Mediennutzung2.3.3 Lebenswelten und Sinusmilieus; 2.3.4 Typen der Mediennutzung; 2.3.5 Situationsübergreifende Medienmenüs; 2.4 Zwischenbefund und Schlussfolgerungen; 2.4.1 Crossmedia-Angebote und ihre Nutzung; 2.4.2 Situationsgebundene Mediennutzung; 2.4.3 Messung situationsgebundener Mediennutzung; 3. Methodik; 3.1 Forschung zwischen zwei Kulturen; 3.1.1 Wissenstransfer zwischen Forschenden und Praktikern; 3.1.2 Forschungsperspektive und Forschungsplan; 3.1.3 Nutzen für Praktiker und Forschende; 3.2 Das Triangel-Modell
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.1 Theorien-, Forscher- und Datentriangulation3.2.2 Methoden-Mix; 3.2.3 Integriertes Paneldesign; 3.3 Die Grounded Theory; 3.3.1 Kodieren; 3.3.2 Sampling; 3.3.3 Kategorisieren; 3.3.4 Memoing; 3.3.5 Die Grounded Theory in der Praxis; 3.4 Wissenschaftstheoretischer Hintergrund; 3.4.1 Die induktive Sicht und Kritik; 3.4.2 Die deduktive Sicht und Kritik; 3.4.3 Intellektuelle Stile und Objektivitätskriterien; 3.4.4 Synthese: der pragmatische Ansatz; 4. Instrumente; 4.1 Problemzentrierte Interviews; 4.1.1 Konzeption des Leitfadens; 4.1.2 Stichprobe; 4.1.3 Durchführung
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.1.4 Transkription der Interviews
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 40
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbuch Gewerkschaften in Deutschland (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531194950
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (774 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Parallel Title: Print version Handbuch Gewerkschaften in Deutschland
    DDC: 306.3
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: In Politik und Gesellschaft der Bundesrepublik zählen die Gewerkschaften - auch jenseits der Arbeitsbeziehungen - zu den wichtigsten politischen Akteuren. In diesem grundlegenden Handbuch, das führende Gewerkschaftsforscher versammelt, findet sich ein Überblick, der den nationalen und internationalen Forschungsstand zu den Gewerkschaften abbildet. In diesem Sinne werden die wesentlichen Daten, Fakten, Akteure, Entwicklungen, Politikfelder und Perspektiven der deutschen Gewerkschaften inklusive ihres internationalen Umfeldes systematisiert und in eine Gesamtschau gebracht. Dabei beleuchten die
    Description / Table of Contents: Zu diesem Band; Inhalt; Gewerkschaften im Transformationsprozess: Herausforderungen, Strategien und Machtressourcen; 1 Einleitung; 2 Gewerkschaften als Gegenstand wissenschaftlicher Forschung; 3 Gewerkschaftliche Macht und heterogene Arbeitsmärkte - drei Welten deutscher Gewerkschaften; 4 Gewerkschaften im deutschen Modell; 5 Umbau der Gewerkschaftslandschaft; 6 Verbetrieblichung - Mehrebenensystem und Gegnerkrise; 7 Gewerkschaften zwischen deutscher Einheit und Europäisierung; 8 Organisation, Funktionäre und Strategiefähigkeit; 9 Fazit; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Die Mitgliederoffensive: kopernikanische Wende in der deutschen Gewerkschaftspolitik1 Mitgliederoffensive; 2 Strukturveränderungen: Macht organisieren; 3 Zusammenfassung; Teil I Geschichte und Funktionen der Gewerkschaften; Geschichte der deutschen Gewerkschaften: Phasen und Probleme; 1 Theorien über die Funktionen der Gewerkschaften; 1.1 Gewerkschaftstheorien vor dem Zweiten Weltkrieg; 1.2 Gewerkschaftstheorien in der Bundesrepublik; 2 Der Weg der Gewerkschaften von der Mitte des 19. Jahrhunderts bis 1933; 2.1 Etappen der Entwicklung zwischen 1848 und 1890
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.2 Expansion der Gewerkschaften im Vierteljahrhundert vor 19142.3 Die Gewerkschaften in Weltkrieg und Revolution; 2.4 Aufschwung und Niedergang in der Weimarer Republik; 3 Wiederaufbau und Wandel der Gewerkschaften nach dem Zweiten Weltkrieg; 3.1 Organisatorische Weichenstellungen und Entwicklungen nach 1945; 3.2 Programmatische Kurskorrekturen und der Kampf um die Mitbestimmung; 3.3 Gewerkschaftliche Arbeitsmarktpolitik in Konjunktur und Krise bis 1990; 4 Erwartungen und Enttäuschungen im vereinten Deutschland; Literaturverzeichnis
    Description / Table of Contents: Funktionen und Funktionswandel der Gewerkschaften in Deutschland1 Einführung in das Thema; 2 Was sind Gewerkschaften und welche Funktionen haben sie ?; 3 Funktion und Funktionswandel der deutschen Gewerkschaften; 3.1 Die deutschen Gewerkschaften in der sozialwissenschaftlichen Diskussion; 3.2 Gewerkschaften im Modell Deutschland - eine Zusammenfassung; 4 Ausblick: Stehen die deutschen Gewerkschaften vor einem neuen Funktionswandel, gar einem Funktionsverlust ?; Literatur; Gewerkschaften in Westeuropa; 1 Späte Entwicklung, frühe Politisierung; 1.1 Industrie- statt Berufsgewerkschaften
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.2 Direktionsrecht und industrielle Demokratie2 Politische Bewegung, organisatorische Einheit und politische Macht; 3 Die Institutionalisierung von Gewerkschaften und Lohnverhandlungen; 3.1 Der Erste Weltkrieg; 3.2 Angehaltene Demokratisierung und die Stabilisierung des kapitalistischen Europa; 3.3 Polarisierung zwischen Faschismus und sozialer Demokratie; 3.4 Das Ende des Zweiten Weltkriegs; 4 Das Aufbrechen des Nachkriegskonsenses: Inflation, Neo-Korporatismus und Restrukturierung; 4.1 1968: Die Rückkehr der Militanz der Arbeiterbewegung
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2 Neo-Korporatismus und Gewerkschaftsbewegungen in den siebziger Jahren
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 41
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Die Spätentscheider : Medieneinflüsse auf kurzfristige Wahlentscheidungen (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658026554
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (294 p)
    Parallel Title: Print version Die Spätentscheider : Medieneinflüsse auf kurzfristige Wahlentscheidungen
    DDC: 302.23
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Wahlen werden in Deutschland mittlerweile maßgeblich von Personen entschieden, die sich erst kurz vor der Wahl auf eine Partei festlegen. Wer aber sind diese Spätentscheider und wie treffen sie ihre Wahl? Sind ihre Entscheidungen irrational und impulsiv oder im Gegenteil besonders gewissenhaft und daher verzögert? Welche Informationen ziehen sie heran und sind sie besonders anfällig für Medieneinflüsse? Um diese und weitere Fragen zu beantworten, haben die Autoren im Bundestagswahlkampf 2009 eine Mehr-Methoden-Studie durchgeführt. Darin verknüpfen sie eine repräsentative Panel-Befragung mit ei
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; 1 Spätentscheider und Medienwirkungen in Wahlkämpfen; 2 Hintergrund: Spätentscheider und Medienwirkungen; 2.1 Spätentscheider in den Theorien des Wahlverhaltens; 2.2 Spätentscheider, Kommunikation und Medienwirkungen; 2.3 Spätentscheider und die Medien im Wahlkampf: EinModell; 3 Untersuchungsdesign, Methoden und Analysestrategie; 3.1 Medieninhaltsanalyse; 3.2 Panel-Befragung; 3.3 Verknüpfung von Inhaltsanalyse und Panel-Befragung; 3.4 Realtime-Response-Analysedes TV-Duells; 4 Externe Einflüsse I: Wahlkampf und TV Duell; 4.1 Der Wahlkampf: Ereignisse, Themen, Positionen, Strategien
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2 Das TV-Duell: Merkel gegen Steinmeier5 Externe Einflüsse II: Die Medienberichterstattung; 5.1 Themen; 5.2 Parteien und Koalitionen; 5.3 Kanzlerkandidaten; 5.4 Meinungsklima; 5.5 Fazit: Die Medienberichterstattung im Wahlkampf 2009; 6 Die Wähler zu Beginn der heißen Wahlkampfphase - Eine Entscheidertypologie; 6.1 Das bisherige Verständnis von Spätentscheidern; 6.2 Identifikation und Definition von Spätentscheidern in dieser Studie; 6.3 Prädispositionen der Spätentscheider; 6.3.1 Soziodemographie, politisches Involvement und längerfristige politische Einstellungen
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.3.2 Unsicherheit bezüglich Themen, Parteien und Kandidaten6.3.3 Psychologische Prädispositionen und Emotionalität; 6.4 Fazit: Entscheidertypen im Wahlkampf 2009; 7 Kommunikationsverhalten und genutzte Medieninhalte; 7.1 Informationsquellen; 7.2 Mediennutzung; 7.3 Medienrepertoires und Segmentierung; 7.4 Gesuchte Informationen und Aufmerksamkeit bei der Mediennutzung; 7.5 Individuell genutzte Medieninhalte; 7.6 Fazit: Kommunikation und individuell genutzte Medieninhalte im Wahlkampf 2009; 8 Einflüsse des Tenorsder Medienberichterstattung auf wahlrelevante Urteile
    Description / Table of Contents: 8.1 „Langfristige" Parteibindung: CDU oder SPD8.2 Meinungen über die Kanzlerkandidaten: Merkel und Steinmeier; 8.3 Kanzlerpräferenz: Merkel oder Steinmeier; 8.4 Einschätzungen der Sachkompetenz der Parteien: CDU und SPD; 8.5 Bewertungen möglicher Koalitionen: Große Koalition und Schwarz-Gelb; 8.6 Koalitionserwartungen: Große Koalition oder Schwarz-Gelb; 8.7 Fazit: Medientenor und wahlrelevante Urteile im Wahlkampf 2009; 9 Einflüsse des Tenors der Medienberichterstattung auf die Wahlentscheidung; 9.1 Wählbare Parteien; 9.2 Sicherheit, Zeitpunkt und kognitiver Aufwand für die Wahlentscheidung
    Description / Table of Contents: 9.3 Wahlabsichten und tatsächliches Wahlverhalten9.4 Fazit: Medientenor und Wahlverhalten im Wahlkampf 2009; 10 Einflüsse des Umfangs der Medienberichterstattung auf Urteilskriterien und Wahlentscheidung (Priming); 10.1 Priming-Effekte auf die Meinungen über die Kanzlerkandidaten; 10.2 Priming-Effekte auf die Wahlabsicht; 10.3 Fazit: Priming-Effekteim Wahlkampf 2009; 11 Fazit: Medien und Wahlentscheidungen im Wahlkampf 2009; 11.1 Zusammenfassung; 11.2 Diskussion und Schlussfolgerungen; 12 Literatur
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 42
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Geburt und Familie : Zugänge zu impliziten Logiken des Paarerlebens (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658019938
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (247 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Parallel Title: Print version Geburt und Familie : Zugänge zu impliziten Logiken des Paarerlebens
    DDC: 304.630973
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Im Zeitraum der Geburt eines Kindes erleben Paare häufig spannungsvolle Irritationen und durchleben Such- und Transformationsprozesse auf der Ebene der Paarbeziehung. Julia Foltys untersucht das Erleben der werdenden Eltern im Spannungsfeld von Wunschbild und Praxis von Geburt in Verknüpfung mit dem „Modus der Herstellung familialer Gemeinschaft“. Die Autorin entwickelt auf der Grundlage des rekonstruktiven Verfahrens der dokumentarischen Methode eine innovative Gesprächsanalyse, die als „Paardiskussion“ den Erfahrungsraum der Paargemeinschaft bzw. Familie selbst ins Zentrum rückt
    Description / Table of Contents: Danksagung; Inhaltsverzeichnis; 1 Einleitung; 1.1 Aufbau der Studie; 2 Familie; 2.1 Der Wandel von Familie vor dem Hintergrund gesamtgesellschaftlicher Individualisierungsprozesse; 2.1.1 Die vorindustrielle Gesellschaftsordnung; 2.1.2 Individualisierungsprozesse seit der Industrialisierung; 2.1.3 Fazit und Kritik; 2.2 Familie heute: eine pluralisierte Lebensform; 2.2.1 Geburtenrückgang; 2.2.2 Lebenserwartung; 2.2.3 Eheschließungen und Ehescheidungen; 2.2.4 Pluralisierung der Lebensformen; 2.2.5 Definition von Familie; 2.3 Der Wandel familialer Beziehungen
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.1 Der Wandel im Geschlechterverhältnis2.3.2 Der Wandel intergenerationeller Familienbeziehungen; 2.3.3 Fazit; 3 Der Zeitraum der Geburt; 3.1 Der Aufstieg des Planungsdenkens; 3.2 Geburtshilfe in Deutschland zwischen der Orientierung an einer „sicheren" und an einer „natürlichen" Geburt; 3.2.1 Ein historischer Abriss der Geburtshilfe in Deutschland; 3.2.2 Die Bedeutung einer pluralisierten Geburtshilfe für die werdenden Eltern; 3.2.3 Kritische Aspekte der Zeit nach der Geburt; 4 Methodologie; 4.1 Die dokumentarische Methode; 4.2 Biographieforschung
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.3 Implikationen für die Konzeptionalisierung von Familie und Paardiskussion5 Der Forschungsprozess; 5.1 Das DFG-Forschungsprojekt „Repräsentationen und Praktiken der Geburt in Familien, Institutionen der Geburtshilfe und Medien"; 5.2 Das Teilprojekt „Geburt in Familien"; 5.3 Das Dissertationsprojekt; 5.4 Auswahl des Samples; 5.5 Darstellung der empirischen Ergebnisse; 6 Fallbeschreibungen; 6.1 Familie Ohlau/Reese; 6.1.1 Das Schwangerschaftserleben; 6.1.2 Das Geburtserleben; 6.1.3 Das Erleben der ersten Zeit nach der Geburt; 6.2 Familie Meinzer; 6.2.1 Das Schwangerschaftserleben
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.2.2 Das Geburtserleben6.2.3 Das Erleben der Zeit nach der Geburt; 7 Komparative Analyse; 7.1 Differenzbearbeitung zwischen den Partnern - Modus der Gemeinschaftsherstellung; 7.1.1 Familie Ohlau/Reese; 7.1.2 Familie Meinzer; 7.2 Bearbeitung von Bild-Praxis-Differenzen: Modus des Erlebens; 7.2.1 Familie Ohlau/Reese; 7.2.2 Familie Meinzer; 7.3 Vergleichsfälle; 7.3.1 Vergleichsfall Familie Greim/Struck; 7.3.2 Vergleichsfall Familie Galig; 8 Sinngenetische Typenbildung; 8.1 Typ 1: sphärenübergreifend körperlich-sinnliches Geburtserleben; 8.1.1 Untertyp 1a: Geburt als Ausnahmesituation
    Description / Table of Contents: 8.1.2 Untertyp 1b: Klärung der Beteiligung beider Partner an der Geburt und visueller Zugang zum Geburtserleben8.2 Typ 2: Sphärenübergreifend technisch-mediales Geburtserleben; 8.3 Typ 3: Ambivalent-sphärengetrennt körperlich-sinnliches Geburtserleben; 9 Soziogenetische Typenbildung; 9.1 Zusammenhänge zwischen geschlechts und generationsspezifischen Erfahrungsräumen und der Familienorientierung; 9.2 Zusammenhänge zwischen dem Bildungsmilieu und der Familienorientierung; 9.3 Zusammenhänge zwischen der Geburtsorientierung und den spezifischen Erfahrungsräumen der Akteure
    Description / Table of Contents: 9.4 Zusammenhänge zwischen dem Modus des Erlebens und den spezifischen Erfahrungsräumen der Akteure
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 43
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Mobilität und Identität : Widerspruch in der modernen Gesellschaft (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658030056
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (137 p)
    Parallel Title: Print version Mobilität und Identität : Widerspruch in der modernen Gesellschaft
    DDC: 305.5094
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: ¿¿Ein deutlicher gesellschaftlicher Wandel vollzieht sich in den letzten Jahren in der zunehmenden Mobilität der Menschen. Hat man sich von der Vorstellung eines Wohn- und Arbeitsortes in unmittelbarer Nähe bereits seit längerem verabschiedet, so werden die Distanzen immer größer. Tägliche Pendelzeiten von über einer Stunde pro Fahrt sind keine Seltenheit mehr. Trotz der ständigen Zunahme dieser neuen Lebensform ist noch kein Wandel von Identitätskonstruktionen in Richtung einer „mobilen Identität"" festzustellen. Ganz im Gegenteil wird die lokale Identität durch eine immer höhere Mobilität no
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhaltsverzeichnis; „Mobilität und Identität - Widerspruch in der modernen Gesellschaft?"; Ortsbezogene Identität Die kognitive Repräsentanz von Orten im Zeichen zunehmender Wohnmobilität; 1 Orte als Bestandteil des Selbstkonzeptes - Drei Perspektiven; 2 Ortsbezogene Identität zwischen Aneignung und Verhalten - Ein theoretisches Konzept; 3 Wohnmobilität und ihre Folgen für ortsbezogene Identität; 4 Fazit; Literaturverzeichnis; Weibliches Sozialkapital in Suburbia? Zum Zusammenhang zwischen Arbeitsmobilität und Ortsbindung im Berliner Umland; 1 Einleitung; 2 Methoden und Operationalisierung
    Description / Table of Contents: 3 Konzeptionelle Grundlagen3.1 Ortsbindung; 3.2 Lokales Sozialkapital; 3.3 Voraussetzungen für die Bildung von Ortsbindung und lokalem Sozialkapital; 4 Empirische Ergebnisse; 4.1 Pendel-und Arbeitszeiten im Berliner Umland; 4.2 Genderspezifische Ortsbindungen von Männern und Frauen; 4.3 Sozialkapital der Bewohnerinnen; 5 Fazit; Literatur; Mobilität als relationale Aushandlung Ein Vergleich zwischen England und der Schweiz; 1 Einleitung; 2 Mobilität als sozialwissenschaftlicher Gegenstand; 3 Ausgangspunkte, Hypothesen und Operationalisierungen; 4 Datengrundlage, Fallauswahl und Methoden
    Description / Table of Contents: 5 Pendelmobilitäten6 Umzugsmobilitäten; 7 Interdependente Mobilitäten; 8 Schlussfolgerungen; Literatur; Mobilität und Identität Eine theoretische und eine empirische Exploration am Beispiel multilokalisierter Akteure; 1 Mobilität und Wohnen: Multilokalität; 2 Die Bedeutung des Raumes in Form lokaler Identifikation.; 2.1 „Identifikation von" und „Identifikation mit"; 3 Mobilität, Multilokalität und Identifikation; 3.1 Mobilität und Identifikation durch Sozialisation; 3.2 Mobilität und Identifikation durch positive Bewertung
    Description / Table of Contents: 4 Zwischenfazit: Identifikationskonstellationen bei Mobilität und Multilokalität1. Verlust der Ortsbindung; 2. Einseitige Stärkung der Ortsbindung; 3. Ortspolygamie; 4. Kosmopolitisierung; 5 Methodisches Vorgehen; 5.1 Rekrutierung, Datensatz, Samplezusammensetzung; 5.2 Operationalisierungen der eingehenden Merkmale; 6 Ergebnisse und Diskussion; 7 Fazit und Ausblick; Literatur; Sozialräumliche Auswirkungen neuer Verkehrsinfrastruktur Visp und der Lötschbergbasistunnel in der Schweiz; 1 Einleitung; 2 Raum und Mobilität; 3 Methoden; 3.1 Beobachtungen; 4 Sozialräumliche Analyse
    Description / Table of Contents: 5 Ergebnisse und Beantwortung der FragestellungenLiteratur; AutorInnen
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 44
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Community Resilience to Sectarian Violence in Baghdad (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9781461488118
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (162 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Peace Psychology Book Series
    Series Statement: Peace Psychology Book Ser.
    Parallel Title: Print version Community Resilience to Sectarian Violence in Baghdad
    DDC: 155.8
    Keywords: Ethnic Conflict Congresses ; Ethnopsychology Congresses ; Resilience, Psychological Congresses ; Sects ; Social aspects.. ; Iraq ; Religion ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: The recent conflict in Iraq evolved from an insurgency against the interim U.S. led government (the Coalition Provisional Authority or CPA) into a sectarian civil war. Violence became widespread, especially in areas of Baghdad City such as Sadr City, Al Amiriyah, and Al Adhamiya. However, a number of multiethnic neighborhoods in Baghdad successfully prevented sectarian attitudes and behaviors from taking hold. Four communities stand out in their self-organization to prevent the escalation of violence. This book looks at what makes these communities different from other areas within Baghdad. In
    Description / Table of Contents: Foreword; Acknowledgments; Contents; 1 Introduction; Abstract; Al-Nil Raises a Question; A Subtle Difference; Resilience and Conflict; Methods; Research Sites; Multicultural Iraq; Amiriyya; Adhamiyya; Dura; Sadr City; Zafaraniyya; Bayaa; Palestine Street; Al-Dhubat; Karada and Kuraiaat; Overview of the Book; References; 2 Violence and Extremism: Sources of Sectarian Violence in Baghdad; Abstract; Constructivism, Identity, and Conflict; Identity Conflict Through a Constructivist Lens; Group Identities in Iraq: Religious and Tribal; Conclusion; References; 3 Conflict Drivers; Abstract
    Description / Table of Contents: Global and Regional LevelsState-Level Sources; EliteIndividual Level; References; 4 Conflict Escalation: The Sharpening of Sectarian Identity; Abstract; Psychological Changes; Group Changes; Change in Communities; Conclusion; References; 5 Resilience: Conceptual Foundations; Abstract; What is Resilience?; Regime Characteristics in Baghdad Neighborhoods; Regime Resilience; Modeling Conflict Resilience; Conclusion; References; 6 Social Capital; Abstract; Defining Social Capital; Relations Between People; Crosscutting Bonds; Overlapping Ties; Relations with "the Community"; Sense of Community
    Description / Table of Contents: Citizen ParticipationPlace Attachment; Conclusion; References; 7 Information and Communication; Abstract; Sources: Leaders, Media and Working Trust; Spaces for Information-Sharing and Communication; Narratives; Conclusions; References; 8 Economic Resources; Abstract; Socioeconomic Status; SES and Resilience to Violence; Mechanisms of Influence; Trade Networks; Conclusions; References; 9 Community Competence; Abstract; Psychological Components of Community Competence; Collective Efficacy; Inward Orientation; Behavioral Components of Community Competence
    Description / Table of Contents: Linkages Between Regime Characteristics and Community CompetencyConclusions; References; 10 Looking Ahead; Abstract; Structural Versus Relational Approaches to Resilience; Strengthening Community Resilience; Spaces for Visioning; Collaborative, Crosscutting Projects; Supporting Peace Leaders; Beyond Baghdad?; Concluding Thoughts; References; Author Biography; Index
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 45
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Kompetenz-Bildung : Soziale, emotionale und kommunikative Kompetenzen von Kindern und Jugendlichen (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658034405
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (405 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Parallel Title: Print version Kompetenz-Bildung
    DDC: 371.9
    Keywords: Interpersonal communication ; Social skills in children ; Social skills in adolescence ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Vor dem Hintergrund veränderter Bedingungen des Aufwachsens wird in der fachöffentlich geführten Bildungsdiskussion der Förderung sozialer, emotionaler und kommunikativer Kompetenzen von Kindern und Jugendlichen eine zunehmende Bedeutung beigemessen. Studien zeigen, dass die Förderung dieser Kompetenzen eine Verbesserung des sozialen Klimas in einer Klasse oder Schule sowie des Leistungsverhaltens zur Folge haben kann. Ist aber Schule der richtige Ort, um soziale, emotionale und kommunikative Kompetenz aufzubauen? Dieser Frage gehen die interdisziplinären Beiträge des Bandes nach, die f
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Einführung; Bildung, Kompetenz, Kompetenz-Bildung; 1 Bildungsfragen; 2 Kompetenzdiskurs; 3 Die Beiträge; Literatur; Begriffe - Möglichkeiten - Grenzen; Bildung sozialer, emotionaler und kommunikativer Kompetenzen - ein komplexer Prozess; 1 Individuelle oder kollektive Fähigkeiten ?; 2 Soziale Kompetenz im Spannungsfeld von Gleichaltrigenkultur und schulischer Ordnung; 3 Familiäre und schulische Einflüsse; 4 Bildung sozialer, emotionaler und kommunikativer Kompetenzen: ein komplexer Prozess; Literatur; Soft skills - destruktive Potentiale des Kompetenzdenkens; 1 Einleitend
    Description / Table of Contents: 2 Was sind soft skills ?3 „Soft skills", „hard skills" und die viel missbrauchte Eisbergmetapher; 4 Die Attraktivität von Kompetenzmodellen: Kompetenzidealismus; 5 Zur Ideologie des Kompetenzdenkens; 6 „Replace the Negative with the Positive" - zur Moral der soft skills; Literatur; Entwicklungslinien in unterschiedlichen Kontexten; Veränderte Bedingungen des Aufwachsens - Jugendliche zwischen Moratorien, Belastungen und Bewältigungsstrategien; 1 Jugend als heterogene Lebensphase; 2 Die „Doppelrolle" der Familie; 3 Der wachsende Stellenwert der Schule; 4 Freizeit als Bildungszeit
    Description / Table of Contents: 5 Peers als Bezugsgrößen im Jugendalter6 Problemverhalten und Entwicklungsprobleme; 6.1 Aufbau von Bewältigungsstrategien; 6.2 Bedingungen für Problembelastungen; 6.3 Deviantes und kriminelles Verhalten; 6.4 Drogenkonsum; 7 Fazit; Literatur; „Freizeit" und „Kultur" als Bildungsorte - Kompetenzerwerb über non-formale und informelle Praxen von Kindern und Jugendlichen; 1 Bildung ist mehr als Schule; 2 Bildung, Freizeit und kulturelle Praxen von Kindern und Jugendlichen - Hinweise und Vergewisserungen; 3 Kompetenzerwerb in informellen und non-formalen Praxen und Kontexten
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.1 Lernen in informellen, nicht organisierten Bildungsräumen - Kinder und Jugendliche zwischen Freundschaftsnetzen und Medien3.2 Selbstbestimmte, institutionalisierte Bildungsräume: Lernmöglichkeiten in Vereinen, Jugendverbänden und über ehrenamtliches Engagement; 3.3 Non-formale, pädagogisch gerahmte Bildungsräume - Szenarien der einrichtungsbezogenen sozialen und kulturellen Kinder- und Jugendarbeit; 4 Blick für informelle und non-formale Formen des Kompetenzerwerbs sensibilisieren - Ausblick; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Der Wandel familialen Zusammenlebens und seine Bedeutung für die (schulischen) Bildungsbiographien der Kinder1 Familien heute sind auch alternative Familien; 2 Familien sind Scheidungsfamilien ?; 3 Kinder sind heute geschwisterlose Kinder ?; 4 Familie ist heute Mehrgenerationenfamilie; 5 Mütter sind heute berufstätige Mütter; 6 Familien sind auch arme Familien; 7 Familien sind mediatisierte Familien; 8 Familie ist Aushandlungsfamilie; 9 Eine kurze abschließende Bemerkung; Literatur; Frühkindliche Bildung - Basisbaustein der Bildungskarriere; 1 Zum Begriff „Frühkindliche Bildung"
    Description / Table of Contents: 2 Theorien über die Entwicklung des Zugangs zur Welt
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 46
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    A positive psychology perspective on quality of life (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    Language: English
    Edition: Online-Ausg. [S.l.] eblib 2012 Online-Ressource
    Series Statement: Social Indicators Research Series 51
    Series Statement: EBL-Schweitzer
    Series Statement: Social indicators research series
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    DDC: 150
    Keywords: Positive psychology ; Electronic books
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
  • 47
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Migration, Diaspora and Identity : Cross-National Experiences (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400772113
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 online resource (218 p.))
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: International Perspectives on Migration
    Series Statement: EBL-Schweitzer
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Migration, diaspora and identity
    DDC: 304.8
    RVK:
    DO 9000
    RVK:
    MS 1560
    RVK:
    LB 56000
    RVK:
    MS 3600
    Keywords: Emigration and immigration -- Economic aspects ; Emigration and immigration -- Social aspects ; Globalization ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Migration ; Diaspora ; Identität ; Geschlechterrolle
    Abstract: Acknowledgements; Contents; Introduction; Introduction; Persisting with Difference; Does Diaspora Matter?; Framing the Collection; Multiple Belongings; Representing a Way of Being; Sexualised Identifications; Marriage and Family; The Significance of Gender; Defiantly Different; References; Part I Multiple Belongings; Living on the Move; Beyond the Dichotomous Choice Between Assimilation and Ethnic Closure; Methodology and a Brief Sketch of the Italian Situation; The Development of a Complex Identification; A Supplementary Hypothesis: The Emergence of a New Generational Experience
    Abstract: Diachronic Fluctuations: The Complex Bonds with Memory, Traditions and Family TiesSynchronic Fluctuations: The Complex Bond Between Inclusion and Differentiation; Tactical Ethnicity; References; Muslim Women in Western Preschooling; Introduction; 'Auntie ' as a Term; Communities and Religious Identity; Muslims in Diaspora and Globalisation; Non-Muslim Families; Conclusion; References; 'When I Land in Islamabad I Feel Home and When I Land in Heathrow I Feel Home'; Introduction; Diaspora, Gender and Belonging: 'The Homing of Diaspora,' 'The Diasporising of Home'
    Abstract: Class, Gender and 'Diaspora Space': South Asian Settlers in the City of London, in the Midlands and in the North of EnglandBeing a Londoner' or 'from Yorkshire': 'Heathrow' or What Does It Mean to Live Here and There?; Conclusion; References; Part II Representing a Way of Being; Refugee Women, Education, and Self Authorship; Introduction; Refugee Women, Policy Norms, and Representations; Integrationist Norms and the Microphysics of Power in Settlement Education; Speaking with Refugee Women: Engineering a Reverse Discourse; Capabilities for Freedom; Feedback; An Informed Perspective
    Abstract: Independent Decision Making and Exercising ChoiceEngaging in Debate and Expressing an Informed Position; Developing Skills in Order to Better Understand the Dominant Australian Culture; Cultivating an Open Mind; Developing Critical Enquiry: The Capacity to Question; Discussion; Implications of the Interview Sample to Recommendations; Conclusions; References; Invoking an Ivory Tower; Introduction; Critical Race Theory and Counter Story; Background and Context to Letter; Editorial Correspondence; 'Talking in Circles'; Inverting Relations of Dominance; Selective Readings
    Abstract: Conclusion: Deconstructing an Ivory Tower and the Possibilities for Anti-racismReferences; 'Trouble in the Mall Again' Naming as Social Drama in Multicultural Melbourne; Introduction; Difference and the City; Methodology; The Character of Oakleigh; The Trouble; 'Trouble in the Mall': In Phases; The Breach; Mounting Crises; Redressive Action; Re-integration or Schism?; Analysing the Trouble; Liminal Spaces and the City; Conclusion; References; Beyond Fear and Towards Hope Transnationalism and the Recognition of Rights Across Borders; Introduction: Crossing Borders; Politics of Fear
    Abstract: Transnationalism and Diaspora
    Abstract: Framed in relation to diaspora this collection engages with the subject of how cultural difference is lived and how complex and shifting identities shape and respond to spatial politics of belonging. Diaspora is understood in a variety of ways, which makes this an eclectic collection of papers. Authors use various theoretical frameworks to explore diverse groups of people with a variety of experiences in a wide range of settings. They are making sense of the experiences of women and men from a range of ethnic backgrounds, negotiating identities through family, work and education. The micro dyn
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
  • 48
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Knowledge and the Economy (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400761308
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (290 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Knowledge and Space v.5
    Parallel Title: Print version Knowledge and the Economy
    DDC: 306.43
    RVK:
    MS 6950
    RVK:
    RB 10559
    RVK:
    RB 10651
    Keywords: Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Informationsgesellschaft ; Wissensintensives Unternehmen ; Regionalentwicklung ; Wirtschaftsgeografie ; Welt
    Abstract: The broad spectrum of topics surrounding what is termed the 'knowledge economy' has attracted increasing attention from the scientific community in recent years. The nature of knowledge-intensive industries, the spatiality of knowledge, the role of proximity and distance in generating functional knowledge, the transfer of knowledge via networks, and the complex interplay between knowledge, location and economic development are all live academic issues. This book, the fifth volume in Springer's Knowledge and Space series, focuses on the last of these: the multiple relationships between knowledg
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Contributors; Part I: Knowledge Creation and the Geography of the Economy; Chapter 1: Introduction: Knowledge and the Geography of the Economy; Knowledge and the Economy; Knowledge and Geography; The Structure of This Book; References; Chapter 2: Relations Between Knowledge and Economic Development: Some Methodological Considerations; Open Questions and Shortcomings in the Discussion on the Diffusion of Codified Knowledge; The Importance of Having a Lead in Information, Knowledge and Technology
    Description / Table of Contents: The Economic "Utility" of Literacy, Educational Attainment and Research in the Course of HistoryThe Spatial Dimension's Significance in the Generation and Diffusion of Knowledge; What Is the Added Value of Considering Spatial Structures and Contexts?; How Can a Milieu or Context of Action Be Defined?; Possible Conceptions of the Relations Between Milieu and Actor; How Relevant Are Spatial Proximity and Distance to the Generation of Knowledge? 5; The Significance of the Scale of Inquiry
    Description / Table of Contents: The Time Dimension's Significance in the Analysis of the Relation Between Knowledge and Economic DevelopmentConclusion; References; Chapter 3: A Microeconomic Approach to the Dynamics of Knowledge Creation; A Model of Collective Invention; Revisiting the Traditional Arrovian Hypotheses; The Vital Role of Knowing Communities; The Process of Collective Invention Viewed as a Codification Process; The Central Role of Boundary Spanners; The Stabilization Phase of the Process of Invention: Meeting the Traditional Conditions; The Respective Roles of Organizations, Individuals, and Communities
    Description / Table of Contents: The Process of Innovation Beyond the Phase of EmergenceSome Main Consequences of the Model of Collective Invention; The Consequences for the Interpretation of Property Rights; The Consequences in Terms of Creative Clusters; Conclusion; Appendix; References; Chapter 4: Knowledge Creation and the Geographies of Local, Global, and Virtual Buzz; The Role of Proximity and F2F Interaction; Permanent Co-presence in Clusters and Local Buzz; Organizational Co-presence in Global Networks; Temporary F2F Interaction and Global Buzz; CMC Versus F2F Collaboration in Groups and Corporations; Conclusion
    Description / Table of Contents: ReferencesChapter 5: Creativity: Who, How, Where?; Who Is Creative?; Cultural Industries and Creative Industries; Creative Organizations: How to Manage Creativity-Or at Least Facilitate It; Where Does Creativity Happen? Creative Places; Why Creativity Needs Cities; The Example of Google; Conclusions; References; Chapter 6: The Problem of Mobilizing Expertise at a Distance; Conceptualizing the Organizational Challenge of Knowledge Transfer; Trading off Organizational Coherence and Geographical Expansion; Know-Who: Networks of Personal Knowledge Transfer; The Case of MILECS; Data and Methods
    Description / Table of Contents: How Vulnerable Is the MILECS Knowledge Network?
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 49
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Spatial Microsimulation: A Reference Guide for Users (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400746237
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 277 p. 51 illus., 10 illus. in color, digital)
    Series Statement: Understanding Population Trends and Processes 6
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Spatial microsimulation
    RVK:
    MS 4000
    RVK:
    MR 2800
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Quality of Life ; Geography ; Economics Statistics ; Quality of Life Research ; Demography ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Quality of Life ; Geography ; Economics Statistics ; Quality of Life Research ; Demography ; Spatial analysis (Statistics) ; Space ; Computer simulation ; Statistical matching ; Demography ; Demographie ; Räumliche Statistik ; Mikrosimulation
    Abstract: This book is a practical guide on how to design, create and validate a spatial microsimulation model. These models are becoming more popular as academics and policy makers recognise the value of place in research and policy making. Recent spatial microsimulation models have been used to analyse health and social disadvantage for small areas; and to look at the effect of policy change for small areas. This provides a powerful analysis tool for researchers and policy makers. This book covers preparing the data for spatial microsimulation; a number of methods for both static and dynamic spatial microsimulation models; validation of the models to ensure the outputs are reasonable; and the future of spatial microsimulation. The book will be an essential handbook for any researcher or policy maker looking to design and create a spatial microsimulation model. This book will also be useful to those policy makers who are commissioning a spatial microsimulation model, or looking to commission work using a spatial microsimulation model, as it provides information on the different methods in a non-technical way.
    Description / Table of Contents: Spatial Microsimulation: A Reference Guide for Users; Foreword; Contents; Part I: Background; Chapter 1: Introduction to Spatial Microsimulation: History, Methods and Applications; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 History of Spatial Microsimulation; 1.3 Applications of Spatial Microsimulation Models; 1.4 Validation of Spatial Microsimulation Models; 1.5 The Future; 1.6 Conclusion; References; Chapter 2: Building a Static Spatial Microsimulation Model: Data Preparation; 2.1 Data Sources and Requirements; 2.2 Sample Scope; 2.3 Unit of Analysis; 2.3.1 Non-private Dwellings
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.2 Non-classifiable Households2.4 Population Imputation; 2.4.1 Imputation of Child Records; 2.4.2 Imputation of a Non-private Dwelling Population; 2.5 Matching Variable Definitions in the Sample Survey and the Census; 2.6 Uprating and Deflating; 2.7 Balancing Data; 2.8 Conclusion; References; Part II: Static Spatial Microsimulation Models; Chapter 3: An Evaluation of Two Synthetic Small-Area Microdata Simulation Methodologies: Synthetic Reconstruction and Combinatorial Optimisation; 3.1 Background; 3.2 Synthetic Reconstruction and Combinatorial Optimisation Methodologies
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.1 Synthetic Reconstruction3.2.2 Combinatorial Optimisation; 3.3 Innovations in Synthetic Reconstruction; 3.3.1 Modified Monte Carlo Sampling; 3.3.2 Statistical Justification of Reconstruction Order; 3.3.3 Modelled 100% Counts of 10% Data; 3.3.4 Improved Data Linkage; 3.3.5 Data Reconciliation; 3.4 Innovations in Combinatorial Optimisation; 3.4.1 Validated Random Number Generation; 3.4.2 Sequential Table Fitting; 3.4.3 Stratified Household Selection; 3.4.4 RSSZ*: A New Selection Criterion; 3.4.5 Stopping Rules; 3.5 Understanding Between-Area Variation; 3.5.1 Spatial Concentration
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.5.2 Multicollinearity3.6 A Framework for Validating Small-Area Microdata; 3.6.1 Identification of Appropriate Measures of Fit; 3.6.2 Innovations in Types of Fit Measured; 3.7 The Impact on Combinatorial Optimisation of Selected Improvements; 3.7.1 Substitution of TAE with RSSZ *; 3.7.2 Stratified Household Selection; 3.8 Synthetic Reconstruction vs. Combinatorial Optimisation; 3.8.1 ED-Level Mean Fit; 3.8.2 ED-Level Fit of the Mean; 3.8.3 Ward-Level Fit; 3.8.4 Fit of Unconstrained Counts; 3.9 Conclusion; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 4: Estimating Small-Area Income Deprivation : An Iterative Proportional Fitting Approach4.1 Background; 4.2 Small-Area Income Estimation Methods; 4.3 The Iterative Proportion Fitting Approach; 4.3.1 Definition of Income; 4.3.2 Choice of Constraint Variables; 4.3.3 Small-Area IPF Algorithm Implementation; 4.4 Results; 4.5 Validation; 4.6 Conclusions and Future Directions; References; Chapter 5: SimObesity: Combinatorial Optimisation (Deterministic) Model; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Why Use Spatial Microsimulation Modelling to Model Disease Data?; 5.2.1 Why Use a Deterministic Model?
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.3 SimObesity Methodology
    Description / Table of Contents: Part 1: Background: Chapter 1: Introduction to spatial microsimulation - History, Methods and Applications: Robert Tanton and Kimberley Edwards -- Chapter 2: Building a static spatial microsimulation model: data preparation: Rebecca Cassells, Riyana Miranti and Ann Harding -- Part 2: Static spatial microsimulation models -- Chapter 3: An Evaluation of Two Synthetic Small-Area Microdata simulation methodologies: Synthetic Reconstruction and Combinatorial Optimisation methodologies: Paul Williamson -- Chapter 4: Estimating Small Area Income Deprivation: An Iterative Proportional Fitting Approach: Ben Anderson -- Chapter 5: SimObesity: Combinatorial Optimisation (deterministic) model: Kimberley Edwards and Graham Clarke -- Chapter 6: Spatial Microsimulation using a generalised regression model: Robert Tanton, Ann Harding and Justine McNamara -- Chapter 7: Creating a Spatial Microsimulation model of the Irish Local Economy: Niall Farrell, Karyn Morrissey and Cathal O’Donoghue -- Chapter 8: Linking static spatial microsimulation modelling to meso-scale models: The Relationship between Access to GP services & Long Term Illness: Karyn Morrissey, Graham Clarke and Cathal O’Donoghue -- Chapter 9: Projections using a static Spatial Microsimulation model: Yogi Vidyattama and Robert Tanton -- Chapter 10: Limits of static Spatial Microsimulation models: Robert Tanton and Kimberley Edwards -- Part 3: Dynamic spatial microsimulation models -- Chapter 11: Moses: A dynamic spatial microsimulation model for demographic planning: Belinda Wu and Mark Birkin -- Chapter 12: Design principles for micro models: Einar Holm and Kalle Mäkilä -- Chapter 13: SimEducation: a dynamic spatial microsimulation model for understanding educational inequalities: Dimitris Kavroudakis, Dimitris Ballas and Mark Birkin -- Chapter 14: Challenges for spatial dynamic microsimulation modelling: Mark Birkin -- Part 4: Validation of spatial microsimulation models and conclusion -- Chapter 15: Validation of spatial microsimulation models: Kimberley Edwards and Robert Tanton -- Chapter 16: Conclusions and the future of spatial microsimulation modelling: Graham Clarke and Ann Harding..
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4623-7
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 50
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbook of the Sociology of Mental Health (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400742765
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXI, 636 p. 29 illus, digital)
    Edition: 2nd ed. 2013
    Series Statement: Handbooks of Sociology and Social Research
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Handbook of the sociology of mental health
    Parallel Title: Print version Handbook of the Sociology of Mental Health
    RVK:
    MS 6250
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Public health ; Psychiatry ; Psychology, clinical ; Consciousness ; Social Sciences ; Social psychiatry ; Mental illness ; Social aspects ; Psychische Störung ; Psychische Gesundheit ; Medizinsoziologie
    Abstract: This second edition of the Handbook of the Sociology of Mental Health features theory-driven reviews of recent research with a comprehensive approach to the investigation of the ways in which society shapes the mental health of its members and the lives of those who have been diagnosed as having a mental illnessThe award-winning Handbook is distinctive in its focus on how the organization and functioning of society influences the occurrence of mental disorder and its consequences. A core issue that runs throughout the text concerns the differential distribution of mental illness across various social strata, defined by status characteristics such as gender, race/ethnicity, socioeconomic status, and age. The contributions to this volume shed light on the social, cultural, and economic factors that explain why some social groups have an elevated risk of disorder. They also address the social repercussions of mental disorder for individuals, including stigmatization within the larger society, and for their families and social networks.The second edition of this seminal volume includes substantial updates to previous chapters, as well as seven new chapters on: -The Individuals Experience of Mental Illness.--The Medicalization of Mental Illness.---Age, Aging, and Mental Health.- -Religion and Mental Health.- -Neighborhoods and Mental Health.- -Mental Health and the Lawand Public Beliefs about Mental Illness.
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4276-5
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 51
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Crime, HIV and Health: Intersections of Criminal Justice and Public Health Concerns (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789048189212
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXXVI, 299 p. 18 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Crime, HIV and health
    RVK:
    MS 6350
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Public health ; Criminology ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Public health ; Criminology ; Sozialwissenschaften ; Public health ; Kriminologie ; Aufsatzsammlung ; USA ; Öffentliches Gesundheitswesen ; Kriminalität ; HIV ; USA ; Strafjustiz ; HIV ; Gesundheitsgefährdung
    Abstract: Carefully selected to reflect the latest research at the interface between public health and criminal justice in the US, these contributions each focus on an aspect of the relationship. How, for example, might a person's criminal activity adversely affect their health or their risk of exposure to HIV infection? The issues addressed in this volume are at the heart of policy in both public health and criminal justice. The authors track a four-fold connection between the two fields, exploring the mental and physical health of incarcerated populations; the health consequences of crime, substance abuse, violence and risky sexual behaviors; the extent to which high crime rates are linked to poor health outcomes in the same neighborhood; and the results of public health interventions among traditional criminal justice populations. As well as exploring these urgent issues, this anthology features a wealth of remarkable interdisciplinary contributions that see public health researchers focusing on crime, while criminologists attend to public health issues. The papers provide empirical data tracking, for example, the repercussions on public health of a fear of crime among residents of high-crime neighborhoods, and the correlations between HIV status and outcomes, and an individual's history of criminal activity. Providing social scientists and policy makers with vital pointers on how the criminal justice and public health sectors might work together on the problems common to both, this collection breaks new ground by combining the varying perspectives of a number of key disciplines
    Abstract: Carefully selected to reflect the latest research at the interface between public health and criminal justice in the US, these contributions each focus on an aspect of the relationship. How, for example, might a persons criminal activity adversely affect their health or their risk of exposure to HIV infection? The issues addressed in this volume are at the heart of policy in both public health and criminal justice. The authors track a four-fold connection between the two fields, exploring the mental and physical health of incarcerated populations; the health consequences of crime, substance abuse, violence and risky sexual behaviors; the extent to which high crime rates are linked to poor health outcomes in the same neighborhood; and the results of public health interventions among traditional criminal justice populations.As well as exploring these urgent issues, this anthology features a wealth of remarkable interdisciplinary contributions that see public health researchers focusing on crime, while criminologists attend to public health issues. The papers provide empirical data tracking, for example, the repercussions on public health of a fear of crime among residents of high-crime neighborhoods, and the correlations between HIV status and outcomes, and an individuals history of criminal activity. Providing social scientists and policy makers with vital pointers on how the criminal justice and public health sectors might work together on the problems common to both, this collection breaks new ground by combining the varying perspectives of a number of key disciplines.
    Description / Table of Contents: Crime, HIV and Health: Intersections of Criminal Justice and Public Health Concerns; Introduction; References; Contents; About the Authors; Chapter 1: Crime and Public Health in the United States; 1.1 Substance Use and Violence; 1.2 Vulnerable Populations, Negative Health Outcomes, and Incarceration; 1.3 Exploring Common Ground: Criminal Justice and Public Health; 1.3.1 Incarceration; 1.3.2 Health Risk Behaviors Among High-Risk Youth; 1.3.3 Crime, Health, and Space; 1.3.4 Public Health Interventions and Criminal Justice Populations; References; Part I: The Health of Incarcerated Populations
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 2: A Longitudinal Study of the Prevalence, Development, and Persistence of HIV/STI Risk Behaviors in Delinquent Youth: Implications for Health Care in the Community2.1 Methods; 2.1.1 Sampling Procedures; 2.1.2 Procedures to Obtain Assent and Consent; 2.1.3 Participants; 2.1.4 Procedures for Data Collection; 2.1.5 Measures; 2.1.6 Missing Data; 2.1.6.1 Missing Cases; 2.1.6.2 Missing Data from Interviews Conducted by Telephone; 2.1.7 Independent Variables; 2.1.8 Statistical Analysis; 2.2 Results; 2.2.1 Prevalence of HIV/STI Risk Behaviors
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.2.1.1 Comparing the Baseline and Follow-up InterviewsMales; Females; 2.2.1.2 Prevalence at Follow-up; Males; Females; 2.2.1.3 Gender Differences; 2.2.1.4 Age Differences (Data Not Shown); 2.2.2 Development of HIV/STI Risk Behaviors; 2.2.2.1 Gender Differences; 2.2.2.2 Racial/Ethnic Differences; 2.2.3 Persistence of HIV/STI Risk Behaviors; 2.2.3.1 Gender Differences; 2.2.3.2 Racial/Ethnic Differences; 2.3 Discussion; 2.4 Limitations; 2.5 Conclusions; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 3: Risky Sexual Behavior and Negative Health Consequences Among Incarcerated Female Adolescents: Implications for Public Health Policy and Practice3.1 Pathways into Delinquency for Female Adolescents; 3.2 Health Service Needs and Service Gaps among Incarcerated Female Adolescents; 3.3 STD Screening and Treatment in Juvenile Detention Settings in California; 3.3.1 Profiles of Project Participants and Qualitative Findings; 3.3.2 Qualitative Findings: Condom Use; 3.3.3 Qualitative Findings: Family Life; 3.3.4 Overlap of Family Conflict, Substance Use and Risky Sexual Behaviors
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.4 DiscussionReferences; Chapter 4: Disparities in Mental Health Diagnosis and Treatment Among African Americans: Implications for the Correctional Systems; 4.1 Disparities in Mental Health Diagnoses and Treatment; 4.1.1 Anxiety; 4.1.2 Depression; 4.1.3 Bipolar Disorder; 4.1.4 Schizophrenia; 4.1.5 Treatment Disparities; 4.2 Implications for Correctional Settings; References; Part II: Health Consequences of Crime and Risk Behaviors; Chapter 5: Methamphetamine Use, Personality Traits, and High-Risk Behaviors; 5.1 Research Methods; 5.1.1 Sample Recruitment; 5.1.2 Measures; 5.2 Study Results
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.2.1 Sample
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-90-481-8921-2
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Klappentext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 52
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Governability of Fisheries and Aquaculture : Theory and Applications (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400761070
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 382 p. 29 illus., 4 illus. in color, digital)
    Series Statement: MARE Publication Series 7
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    RVK:
    MF 9100
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Wildlife management ; Marine Sciences ; Humanities ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Wildlife management ; Marine Sciences ; Humanities ; Fischerei ; Governance
    Abstract: Following in the footsteps of the book Fish for Life - Interactive Governance for Fisheries (Kooiman et al., 2005), and the interdisciplinary approach it presents, this volume illustrates the contribution of interactive governance theory to understanding core fisheries and aquaculture challenges. These challenges are invariably linked to broader concerns such as ecosystem health, social justice, sustainable livelihoods and food security. The central concept in this perspective is governability - the varied capacity to govern fisheries and aquaculture systems sustainably. Many of these systems are characterized by problems that are inherently 'wicked' and therefore difficult to address. The authors of this edited volume argue that responses to such problems must consider context; specifically the character of the fisheries and aquaculture systems themselves, their institutional conditions, and the internal and external interactions that affect them. Drawing on a diverse set of international experiences, the volume offers a new lens and systematic approach to analysing the nature of governance problems and opportunities in fisheries and aquaculture, exploring pressing challenges and identifying potential solutions. ”It now seems clear that the crisis in the world’s fisheries [is] a much larger and more complex problem than many had imagined. Yet, examining it through the lens of governability may offer the best hope for alleviating it--as well as alleviating similar crises in other social systems.” James R. McGoodwin (Professor Emeritus, University of Colorado)
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6107-0
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 53
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Economic and Political Change in Asia and Europe : Social Movement Analyses (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400746534
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVIII, 306 p. 9 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Economic and political change in Asia and Europe
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Population ; Demography ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Population ; Demography ; East Asia ; Economic policy ; East Asia ; Economic conditions ; East Asia ; Social policy ; East Asia ; Social conditions ; Europe ; Economic policy ; Europe ; Economic conditions ; Europe ; Social policy ; Europe ; Social conditions
    Abstract: Since the 1973 publication of Alain Peyrefittes prophetic When China Awakens, developments in East Asia have outstripped even the wildest predictions. China has undergone the fastest industrialization and urbanization process in history, yet tensions there are rising as some realize how far they have been left behind. This volume explores the applicability of European economic and social models to our analysis of East Asias and, in particular, Chinas situation. Though millions of Chinese and other Asian people have been lifted out of poverty, inequality is rising nonetheless, and contemporary Europe and Asia are both witnessing collective action against rampant economic neoliberalism in the former and the exclusion of minorities in the latter. It is difficult to overstate the relevance of this assessment, which seeks answers to some central questions: Can events in Europe serve as a model for those in East Asia? Are there similarities or differences between the two regions? To what extent do political, economic or social systems stimulate or inhibit collective action? How culturally equivalent are the collective actions of marginalized/ disadvantaged people in the two locations, or are events in Europe symptomatic of specific cultural attributes? Comparing and contrasting the research tools and dominant paradigms in the social and economic sciences in East Asia and Europe, as this volume does, throws out some revealing results.
    Description / Table of Contents: Economic and Political Change in Asia and Europe; Acknowledgments; Contents; List of Figures; List of Tables; Appendices; Abbreviations; Chapter 1: Collective Action and Relatively Powerless People in Europe and Asia; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Social and Economic Backdrops; 1.3 Recession and Social Movements; 1.4 Common Traits: Asia and Europe; 1.5 Chapter Descriptions; 1.6 Conclusion; References; Part I: Economic, Political and Social Globalization in Asia and Europe; Chapter 2: Economic Change and Social Dynamics: Converging and Diverging Trends Across Different Economies; 2.1 Introduction
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.2 Growth, Structural Change, and Macro Socioeconomic Performance by Broad World Region2.3 Economic Growth, Development, and Poverty; 2.3.1 Broad Trends in Terms of Poverty and Inequality; 2.3.2 Impact of the Recent and Current Economic Shocks; 2.4 Convergence and Equality in the EU; 2.4.1 Between-Country Economic Convergence; 2.4.2 Convergence Across Socioeconomic Groups in the EU; 2.5 The Case of Asia; 2.5.1 Convergence Across Asian Countries; 2.5.2 Convergence Across Socioeconomic Groups in Asia; 2.6 Conclusions; 2.7 Appendices
    Description / Table of Contents: Appendix 2.1 List of Countries Included in the Major World Regions (See Table  2.1)Appendix 2.2 Indicators Developed (or Being Developed) by the Commission so as to Measure Social Cohesion (Sample); References; Chapter 3: European Integration, Social Cohesion, and Political Contentiousness; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 The European Structure of Grievances: The Renaissance of "Old" Issues; 3.3 Social Cohesion in Europe: Spatial and Social Cleavages; 3.3.1 Social Cohesion: The Core and the Peripheries; 3.3.2 Social Cohesion and Class
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.4 Discussion and Conclusions: Social Cohesion and the Political Sociology of EuropeReferences; Chapter 4: Images and Frameworks of Collective Action in China; 4.1 Assumptions from a Western Concept; 4.2 Reconstruction of a Chinese Traditional Heritage; 4.2.1 Interpersonal Relations, Intention, Ritual, and Mankind; 4.2.2 Traces of Collectivity in Chinese History; 4.3 The Affirmative Societal Role of Collective Action; 4.3.1 Statehood, Citizens, and Welfare; 4.3.2 Authoritarianism, Democratization, and Collective Action; 4.4 Collective Action with Chinese Characteristics; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 5: European Governance and Democracy5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Immigration and Citizenship: Building the Fortress; 5.3 Organizing the Unemployed Within the Member States; 5.4 European Marches and Alter-Globalization Movements; 5.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 6: Agricultural Markets and Food Riots: The European Union and Asia Compared; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Main Drivers Affecting the Food System; 6.3 Prices Crisis or Food Crisis?; 6.4 Food Riots and Policy Responses; 6.5 Food Aid Policies; 6.6 Concluding Remarks; References; Part II: Social Movements in a Transnational Perspective
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 7: Marginalization and Transnationalizing Movements: How Does One Relate to the Other?
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4653-4
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 54
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Melanin Millennium : Skin Color as 21st Century International Discourse (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400746084 , 1283633876 , 9781283633871
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 348 p. 32 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T.
    RVK:
    MS 3530
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Philosophy (General) ; Applied psychology ; Law Psychological aspects ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Philosophy (General) ; Applied psychology ; Law Psychological aspects ; Hautfarbe ; Bleichen ; Ethnische Beziehungen ; Rassendiskriminierung
    Abstract: In the aftermath of the 60s "Black is Beautiful movement and publication of The Color Complex almost thirty years later the issue of skin color has mushroomed onto the world stage of social science. Such visibility has inspired publication of the Melanin Millennium for insuring that the discourse on skin color meet the highest standards of accuracy and objective investigation. This volume addresses the issue of skin color in a worldwide context. A virtual visit to countries that have witnessed a huge rise in the use of skin whitening products and facial feature surgeries aiming for a more Caucasian-like appearance will be taken into account. The book also addresses the question of whether using the laws has helped to redress injustices of skin color discrimination, or only further promoted recognition of its divisiveness among people of color and Whites. The Melanin Millennium has to do with now and the future. In the 20th century science including eugenics was given to and dominated by discussions of race category. Heretofore there remain social scientists and other relative to the issue of skin color loyal to race discourse. However in their interpretation and analysis of social phenomena the world has moved on. Thus while race dominated the 20th century the 21st century will emerge as a global community dominated by skin color and making it the melanin millennium.
    Description / Table of Contents: The Melanin Millennium; Preface; Contents; Chapter 1: The Bleaching Syndrome: Western Civilization vis-à-vis Inferiorized People of Color; References; Chapter 2: The Historical and Cultural Influences of Skin Bleaching in Tanzania; Historical and Cultural Influences: Institutions That Placed Tanzanians in a Color-Conscious Society; Enslaved by the Arabs; Controlled by the British, Colonized by the Germans; The Cycle Continues: Postcolonization; Westernization and Neocolonialism
    Description / Table of Contents: How Color-Conscious Societies Fuel Potent Skin-Color Ideals That Result in Efforts to Assimilate into Dominant GroupsIntrapsychic Conflict and Motivation to Assimilate; The Psychological Consequences of Living in Color-Conscious Societies; Inferiority and Low Self-Esteem; Identity Development; Where to Go from Here; Research Implications; Policy and Practice Implications; Conclusion; References; Chapter 3: Pathophysiology and Psychopathology of Skin Bleaching and Implications of Skin Colour in Africa; Introduction; Skin Colour: Anatomy, Biochemistry, and Physiology
    Description / Table of Contents: Body Dysmorphic Disorder (BDD)What Are the Causes of Somatoform Disorders?; The Light Skin Fad; Pathophysiology of Skin Bleaching; Mechanisms of Skin Bleaching; Trigger Factors: Psychosocial Disturbances; Exposure to Bleaching Agents; Alteration of the Skin Biochemical and Anatomical Composition; In Contemporary Africa; References; Chapter 4: An Introduction to Japanese Society's Attitudes Toward Race and Skin Color; Introduction; Historical Japanese Treatments of Foreigners, Based Upon Skin Color; Roots of the Coloring of the World: Fukuzawa Yukichi's Theories of "Civilization"
    Description / Table of Contents: The Otaru Onsens Case and Japan's Judicial Valuation of Skin ColorContemporary Japanese Media Expressions of Valuation of Skin Color; Conclusion; References; Chapter 5: Mapping Color and Caste Discrimination in Indian Society; Foregrounding Racism in India; Revisiting the Mythical "Aryan Supremacy"; What Scriptures Say; Aryans, Varna, and Jāti; Revisiting the Aryan Supremacy; Questioning the Aryan Supremacy Myth: Non-Brahmanical Contestations; Notion of Beauty and Contemporary Forms of Preserving White Superiority; Notions of Femininity and Beauty in India; Whitening Cream Culture; Conclusion
    Description / Table of Contents: ReferencesChapter 6: Indigeneity on Guahan: Skin Color as a Measure of Decolonization; Introduction; Traditional Concepts of Skin Color; The Impact of Colonization and Western Values; Indigeneity and Decolonization; Conclusion; References; Chapter 7: A Tale of Two Cultures; References; Chapter 8: Where Are You From?; Introduction: The "Where Are You From?" Question; How to Answer the "Where Are You From?" Question; The Founding Migration; The Founding Origin; Melanin: An Insuperable Sign of Otherness?; Promise and Delusion of a Project?; Assimilation and Integration
    Description / Table of Contents: Ethnic Statistics in France: Wishes and Fears
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4608-4
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 55
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Models of God and Alternative Ultimate Realities (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400752191
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXI, 1041 p. 8 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    RVK:
    BF 1530
    Keywords: Philosophy (General) ; Humanities ; Religion (General) ; Philosophy ; Philosophy (General) ; Philosophy ; Humanities ; Religion (General)
    Abstract: The envisioned volume is a collection of recent essays about the philosophical exploration, critique and comparison of (a) the major philosophical models of God, gods and other ultimate realities implicit in the worlds philosophical schools and religions, and of (b) the ideas of such models and doing such modeling per se. The aim is to identify exactly what a model of ultimate reality is; create a comprehensive and accessible collection of extant models; and determine how best, philosophically, to model ultimate reality, if possible and desirable.
    Abstract: Dedicated to exploring the enormous variety of ultimate realities at the center of the world’s great religions and philosophical traditions, this volume is a richly varied collection of essays on how we conceive this central notion, whether expressed as God, or as an ultimate reality of another kind. Years in the making, the collection examines the guiding principles of 15 major philosophical traditions and 6 living religions. A publication of monumental scale and detail, it features an innovative thematic structure that aggregates traditions according to their core models, allowing the reader to grasp the common features of ultimate realities as understood in diverse traditions such as Hindu, Buddhist, Jewish, Muslim, Christian, and in some non-religious discussions. Borne out of proceedings at both the American Philosophical Association and the American Academy of Religion, the volume also examines foundational questions related to the human propensity for creating and using such models, including the issue of whether we are capable of acquiring knowledge of ultimate reality. It features a sustained analysis of the concept that modeling such an ultimate reality is a fruitless endeavor doomed to failure since the ultimate might well be beyond human conception, as well as reflections on the staggering diversity of these models and their application to concepts such as spirituality, gender equality, war, and global warming. Accessible and authoritative, the collection combines section primers for those new to the field, deeper treatment in dedicated essays, and a wealth of references for further reading and study
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-5219-1
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 56
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    C. Henry Kempe: A 50 Year Legacy to the Field of Child Abuse and Neglect (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400740846 , 1282056964 , 9781282056961
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XXIV, 269 p. 6 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Child Maltreatment, Contemporary Issues in Research and Policy 1
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. C. Henry Kempe
    RVK:
    XL 4906
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Public health ; Pediatrics ; Quality of Life ; Social work ; Quality of Life Research ; Developmental psychology ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Public health ; Pediatrics ; Quality of Life ; Social work ; Quality of Life Research ; Developmental psychology ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Bibliografie ; Kindesmisshandlung ; Kempe, Charles Henry 1922-1984 ; Kindesmisshandlung ; Kempe, Charles Henry 1922-1984
    Abstract: The book series, 'Child Maltreatment: Contemporary Issues in Research and Policy.' will consist of a state of the art handbook (to be revised every five years) and two to three volumes per year. The first volume in this series is a legacy to C. Henry Kempe. This is a timely publication because 2012 marks 50 years after the appearance of the foundational article by C. Henry Kempe and his colleagues, 'The Battered-Child Syndrome.' This volume capitalizes on this 50 year anniversary to stand back and assess the field from the perspective that Dr. Kempes early contributions and ideas are still being played out in practice and policy today. The volume will be released at the next ISPCAN meeting, also in 2012.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4084-6
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 57
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Intelligent Data Mining in Law Enforcement Analytics : New Neural Networks Applied to Real Problems (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400749146
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVIII, 516 p. 185 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T.
    RVK:
    PL 625
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Artificial intelligence ; Social sciences Methodology ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Artificial intelligence ; Social sciences Methodology
    Abstract: This book provides a thorough summary of the means currently available to the investigators of Artificial Intelligence for making criminal behavior (both individual and collective) foreseeable, and for assisting their investigative capacities. The volume provides chapters on the introduction of artificial intelligence and machine learning suitable for an upper level undergraduate with exposure to mathematics and some programming skill or a graduate course. It also brings the latest research in Artificial Intelligence to life with its chapters on fascinating applications in the area of law enforcement, though much is also being accomplished in the fields of medicine and bioengineering. Individuals with a background in Artificial Intelligence will find the opening chapters to be an excellent refresher but the greatest excitement will likely be the law enforcement examples, for little has been done in that area. The editors have chosen to shine a bright light on law enforcement analytics utilizing artificial neural network technology to encourage other researchers to become involved in this very important and timely field of study.
    Description / Table of Contents: Dedication -- Preface.- Chapter 1. Introduction to Artificial Networks and Law Enforcement Analytics; William J. Tastle -- Chapter 2. Law Enforcement and Artificial Intelligence; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 3. The General Philosophy of Artificial Adaptive Systems; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 4. A Brief Introduction to Evolutionary Algorithms and the Genetic Doping Algorithm; M. Buscema, M. Capriotti -- Chapter 5. Artificial Adaptive Systems in Data Visualization: Pro-Active data; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 6. The Metropolitan Police Service Central Drug Trafficking Database: Evidence of Need; Geoffrey Monaghan and Stefano Terzi -- Chapter 7. Supervised Artificial neural Networks: Back Propagation Neural Networks; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 8. Pre-Processing Tools for Non-Linear Data Sets; Massimo Buscema, Alessandra Mancini and Marco Breda -- Chapter 9. Metaclassifiers; Massimo Buscema, Stefano Terzi -- Chapter 10. Auto Identification of a Drug Seller Utilizing a Specialized Supervised Neural Network; Massimo Buscema and Marco Intraligi -- Chapter 11. Visualization and Clustering of Self-Organizing Maps; Giulia Massini -- Chapter 12. Self-Organizing Maps: Identifying Non-Linear Relationships in Massive Drug Enforcement Databases; Guila Massini -- Chapter 13. Theory of Constraint Satisfaction Neural Networks; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 14. Application of the Constraint Satisfaction Network; Marco Intraligi and Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 15. Auto-Contractive Maps, h Function and the Maximally regular Graph: A new methodology for data mining; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 16. Analysis of a Complex Dataset Using the Combined MST and Auto Contractive Map; Giovanni Pieri -- Chapter 17. Auto Contractive Mapsand Minimal Spanning tree: Organization of Complex datasets on criminal behavior to aid in the deduction of network connectivity; Giula Massini and Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 18. Data Mining Using Non-linear Auto Associative Artificial Neural Networks: The Arrestee Dataset; Massimo Buscema -- Chapter 19. Artificial Adaptive System for Parallel Querying of Multiple Databases; Massimo Buscema.-.
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4914-6
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 58
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Social Morphogenesis (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400761285
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VI, 231 p. 17 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T.
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Social morphogenesis
    RVK:
    MR 5800
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Konferenzschrift ; Sozialer Wandel
    Abstract: The rate of social change has speeded up in the last three decades, but how do we explain this? This volume ventures what the generative mechanism is that produces such rapid change and discusses how this differs from late Modernity. Contributors examine if an intensification of morphogenesis (positive feedback that results in a change in social form) and a corresponding reduction in morphostasis (negative feedback that restores or reproduces the form of the social order) best captures the process involved. This volume resists proclaiming a new social formation as so many books written by empiricists have done by extrapolating from empirical data. Until we can convincingly demonstrate that a new generative mechanism is at work, it is premature to argue what accounts for the global changes that are taking place and where they will lead. More concisely we seek to answer the question whether or not current social change can be regarded as social morphogenesis. Only then, in the next volumes will the same team of authors be able to remove the question mark
    Description / Table of Contents: Social Morphogenesis; Contents; 1 Social Morphogenesis and the Prospects of Morphogenic Society; 1.1…Part 1. Social Morphogenesis and Societal Transformation?; The Rapidity of Social Change and Empiricism's Shortcomings; Social Morphogenesis: From Toolkit to Theory; Three Levels of Social Morphogenesis; Transformations of the Third-Order; References; Part I Social Morphogenesis and Societal Transformation?; 2 Morphogenesis and Social Change; 2.1…The Morphogenetic Approach; 2.2…Social Change Understood Morphogenetically; 2.3…The Morphogenetic Approach Versus the Current Conflationisms
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4…Where Are We Now?References; 3 The Morphogenetic Approach and the Idea of a Morphogenetic Society: The Role of Regularities; 3.1…The Topic: Morphogenesis from Meta-Theory to Forms of Social Order; 3.2…Morphogenesis and Regularity: Making Friends with Old Enemies?; 3.3…Duration, Pace, Trajectory, Turning Points, Transitions, and Cycles: New Bricks for the Morphogenetic Fabric; 3.4…Conclusion; References; 4 Emergence and Morphogenesis: Causal Reduction and Downward Causation?; 4.1…Emergence; Causal Reduction and Downward Causation; 4.2…Causal Reduction
    Description / Table of Contents: 9 Network Analysis and Morphogenesis: A Neo-Structural Exploration and Illustration
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 1. Introduction: Social Morphogenesis and the Prospects of Morphogenic Society; Margaret S. Archer -- PART I. SOCIAL CHANGE AS MORPHOGENESIS.- Chapter 2. Morphogenesis and Social Change; Douglas V. Porpora -- Chapter 3. The Morphogenetic Approach and the Idea  of Morphogenetic Society. The Role of Regularities; Andrea M. Maccarini -- Chapter 4. Emergence and Morphognesis: Causal Reduction and Downward Causation; Tony Lawson -- Chapter 5 Morphogenesis, Continuity and Change in the International Political System; Colin Wight -- PART II. SOCIAL FORMATIONS AND THEIR RE-FORMATION -- Chapter 6. Self-Organization: What is it, What isn't it and What's it Got to Do with Morphogenesis; Kate Forbes-Pitt -- Chapter 7. Self-Organization as the Mechanism of Development and Evolution in Social Systems; Wolfgang Hofkirchner -- Chapter 8. Morphogenetic Society: Self-Government and Self-Organization as Misleading Metaphors; Maragaret S. Archer.- PART III. SOCIAL NETWORKS: LINKAGES OR BONDS -- Chapter 9. Network Analysis and Morphogenesis: A Neo-Structural Exploration and Illustration; Emmanuel Lazega -- Chapter 10. Authority's Hidden Networks: Obligations, Roles and the Morphogenesis of Authority; Ismael Al-Amoudi -- Chapter 11. Morphogenesis and Social Networks: Relational Steering not Mechanical Feedback; Pierpaolo Donati.
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6128-5
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 59
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Sustainable livelihood approach : a critique of theory and practice (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9781299702011 , 9789400762688
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVIII, 190 S. 36) , Ill.
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T.
    RVK:
    QW 500
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Regional planning ; Sustainable development ; Human Geography ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Regional planning ; Sustainable development ; Human Geography
    Abstract: We all view the ubiquitous term ‘sustainability’ as a worthwhile goal. But how can we apply the principles of sustainability in the real world, at the sharp end of communities in developing nations where income insecurity is the troubled norm? This volume provides some practical answers, explaining the precepts of the ‘sustainable livelihood approach’ (SLA) through the case study of a microfinance scheme in Africa. The case study, centered around the work of the Catholic Church’s Diocesan Development Services organization, involved an SLA implemented over two years designed in part to help enhance its existing microfinance operation through closer links between local communities and international donors. The book’s central conclusion is that we must move beyond the concept of sustainable livelihood itself, with its in-built polarities between developed and developing nations, and embrace a more global notion of ‘sustainable lifestyle’; a more nuanced and inclusive approach that encompasses not just how we make a sustainable living, but how we can live sustainable lives
    Description / Table of Contents: Sustainable Livelihood Approach; Foreword; Preface; Acknowledgments; Contents; Abbreviations; 1 Sustainability and Sustainable Livelihoods; 1.1 The Future of Sustainability; 1.2 The Multiverse of Sustainability; 1.3 Practicing Sustainability; 1.4 Structure of the Book; 2 The Theory Behind the Sustainable Livelihood Approach; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 The SLA Framework; 2.3 Definitions of SLA; 2.4 Origins of SLA; 2.5 Capital in SLA; 2.6 Vulnerability and Institutional Context; 2.7 Representation Within SLA; 2.8 The Attractions and Popularity of SLA; 2.9 Critiques of SLA
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.10 SLA for Evidence-Based Intervention2.11 Conclusion; 3 Context of the Sustainable Livelihood Approach; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Governing an African Giant; 3.3 Economic Development in Nigeria; 3.4 A Kingdom Discovered; 3.5 Igala Livelihoods; An Overview; 3.6 The Diocesan Development Services in Igalaland; 3.7 New Pastures; 3.8 Choice of Villages for the SLA; 3.9 Conclusions; 4 The Sustainable Livelihood Approach in Practice; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 The Sample Households; 4.3 Human Capital: The Households; 4.3.1 Household M1 (Headed by the Village Chief)
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.3.2 Household M2 (Headed by a Senior Igbo)4.3.3 Household M3(Igbo Community Leader); 4.3.4 Household M4 (farmer and business man); 4.3.5 Household E1 (Farmer and Vigilante); 4.3.6 Household E2(Madaki of Edeke); 4.3.7 Household E3 (Farmer and Fisherman); 4.3.8 Household E4 (Madaki in Edeke); 4.4 Natural Capital: Land and Farming; 4.5 Natural Capital: Trees; 4.6 Social Capital: Networks; 4.7 Physical Capital: Assets for Income Generation; 4.8 Financial Capital: Household Budgets; 4.9 Vulnerability and Institutional Contexts; 4.10 Did SLA Succeed?; 4.11 Conclusions; 5 Livelihood into Lifestyle
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.1 Introduction5.2 How SLA?; 5.3 Where SLA?; 5.4 Transferability of SLA; 5.5 Livelihood into Lifestyle; 5.6 Conclusions; References; Index
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6268-8
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 60
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Human Law and Computer Law: Comparative Perspectives (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400763142
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VIII, 202 p. 2 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Ius Gentium: Comparative Perspectives on Law and Justice 25
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Human law and computer law
    RVK:
    PZ 3250
    Keywords: Philosophy of law ; Computers Law and legislation ; Humanities ; Law ; Law ; Philosophy of law ; Computers Law and legislation ; Humanities ; Datenverarbeitung ; Internet ; Recht ; Datenverarbeitung ; Internet ; Recht
    Abstract: The focus of this book is on the epistemological and hermeneutic implications of data science and artificial intelligence for democracy and the Rule of Law. How do the normative effects of automated decision systems or the interventions of robotic fellow ‘beings’ compare to the legal effect of written and unwritten law? To investigate these questions the book brings together two disciplinary perspectives rarely combined within the framework of one volume. One starts from the perspective of ‘code and law’ and the other develops from the domain of ‘law and literature’. Integrating original analyses of relevant novels or films, the authors discuss how computational technologies challenge traditional forms of legal thought and affect the regulation of human behavior. Thus, pertinent questions are raised about the theoretical assumptions underlying both scientific and legal practice.
    Description / Table of Contents: Acknowledgements; Contents; Chapter 0: Prefatory Remarks on Human Law and Computer Law; 0.1 Comparative Law; 0.2 Computer Law?; 0.3 Comparing Human Law and Computer Law; 0.4 Human Language and Computer Language: Law, Code and Literature; References; Part I: Law and Code; Chapter 1: Prefatory Remarks on Part I: Law and Code; 1.1 Law and Language; 1.2 Language and Computer Code; 1.3 Law as Code: Two Strands of Research; 1.3.1 Artificial Intelligence and Legal Subjectivity; 1.3.2 Legal and Technological Normativity; References; Chapter 2: From Galatea 2.2 to Watson - And Back?
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1 Introduction 12.1.1 Mythical Beginnings; 2.1.2 Beyond Snow's Two Cultures; 2.2 Eliza and the Turing Test: A Human Machine?; 2.3 IBM's Heros: Deep Blue and Watson; 2.3.1 Deep Blue; 2.3.2 Watson; 2.4 Searle's Chinese Room Argument: Syntax and Meaning; 2.5 Back to 'My Fair Lady'; 2.6 The Legal Status of Smart Contraptions: Tools, Rivals or Companions?; 2.6.1 Embodiment, Emotion and Cognition; 2.6.2 Legal Implications of Smart Agents; 2.6.2.1 Artificial Legal Subjects: The Agency of Corporations; 2.6.2.2 Artificial Legal Subjects: The Agency of Other 'Intelligent Machines'
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.7 Concluding RemarksReferences; Chapter 3: What Robots Want: Autonomous Machines, Codes and New Frontiers of Legal Responsibility; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 The No New Responsibility Thesis; 3.3 The New Weak Responsibility Thesis; 3.3.1 New Crimes, New Punishments; 3.3.2 New Agents, New Contracts; 3.4 The New Strong Responsibility Thesis; 3.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 4: Abort, Retry, Fail: Scoping Techno-Regulation and Other Techno-Effects; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 What Is Techno-Regulation?; 4.3 The Limits of the Debate on Techno-Regulation
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.4 Beyond the Limits of Techno-Regulation, Part 1: Persuasion, Nudging and Affordances4.5 Beyond the Limits of Techno-Regulation, Part 2: Unintentional and Implicit Influences of Technology; 4.6 The Full Scope of Techno-Effects; 4.7 Abort, Retry, Fail. Or: Liberating the Boxed-in Concept of Techno-Regulation; References; Chapter 5: A Bump in the Road. Ruling Out Law from Technology; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Law Is Dead, Long Live Techno-Regulation?; 5.3 Incorporeal Rules or Brute Matter? Two Inescapable Truisms; 5.4 The Practice of Law and the Price of the Practice Turn; 5.5 The Medium of Law
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.6 Hart - The Concept of Law5.6.1 A Practice Theory of Rules; 5.6.2 Demarcating Law as a Practice: Law as a System of Rules; 5.7 Latour - The Passage of Law; 5.7.1 How to Study Law as a Practice? An Ethnography of the Council of State; 5.7.2 Demarcating Law as a Practice: Law as a Regime of Reattachment; 5.7.2.1 The Transfer of Value Objects; 5.7.2.2 Acts of Attachment; 5.7.2.3 Clef de Lecture; 5.8 Beyond Incorporeal Rules and Material Media?; 5.8.1 Institution - Regime of Enunciation; 5.8.2 The Legal Trajectory of Enunciation; 5.9 Law and Technology; 5.9.1 A Bump in the Road
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.9.2 Law as Tracing Through Reattachments
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6314-2
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 61
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Mobile Learning : Potenziale, Einsatzszenarien und Perspektiven des Lernens mit mobilen Endgeräten (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531194837
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (275 p)
    Parallel Title: Print version Mobile Learning : Potenziale, Einsatzszenarien und Perspektiven des Lernens mit mobilen Endgeräten
    DDC: 302.23
    Keywords: Mobile communication systems in education ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Mobile Learning - das Lernen mithilfe von kleinen drahtlosen Geräten wie Smartphones - etabliert sich als Möglichkeit, selbstgesteuerte Lernprozesse in tägliche Arbeitsabläufe einzubinden, ortsunabhängig Zugang zu Informationen, sozialen Netzwerken oder Lern- und Arbeitswerkzeugen zu haben bzw. auf kleine Lerneinheiten für einen situativen Abruf zugreifen zu können. Unternehmen und (Hoch-)Schulen haben das Potential mobilen Lernens entdeckt. In diesem Sammelband wird das Thema Mobile Learning grundlegend behandelt. Zudem berichten die AutorInnen aus Wirtschaft und Hochschule anhand von Praxi
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; 1 Einleitung; Literatur; Teil I Lernen, Arbeiten und Forschen mit Mobile Learning; 2 Vom E-Learning zum Mobile Learning - wie Smartphones und Tablet PCs Lernen und Arbeit verbinden; 2.1 Einleitung: Mobilität als Schlüsselwort unserer Gesellschaft; 2.2 Mobile Learning als Lernform einer mobilen Gesellschaft; 2.3 Mobile Learning als Erweiterung des E-Learning; 2.4 Kontextualisierung; 2.5 Mobiles Lernen im Kontext der Arbeit; 2.6 Die Notwendigkeit von Theorien des Lernens und der Bildung im mobilen Zeitalter; 2.7 Ausblick; 2.8 Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: 3 Mobiles Lernen - Systematik, Theorien und Praxis eines noch jungen Forschungsfeldes3.1 Einleitung; 3.1.1 Mobiles Lernen ist …; 3.1.2 Mobiles Lernen will …; 3.2 Die Systematik der medienpädagogischen und erziehungswissen-schaftlichen Mobile Learning-Diskussion; 3.2.1 Kontexte der Mobile Learning-Diskussion; 3.2.2 Argumentative Bezugspunkte der Mobile Learning-Diskussion; 3.2.3 Handlungspraktiken der an der Mobile Learning-Diskussion Beteiligten schaffen die Legitimationsbasis der Mobile Learning-Diskussion; 3.2.4 Struktur des Wissenschaftsprozesses der Mobile Learning-Diskussion
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.3 Theorien, Konzepte und Modelle der Mobile Learning-Diskussion3.3.1 Lernende im Zentrum: Theoretischer und konzeptioneller Rahmen der Sozio-kulturellen Ökologie Mobilen Lernens; 3.3.2 „Lernergenerierte Contexte" als Ressource, Konstruktionsprozess und Möglichkeitsraum; 3.4 Praxis des Mobilen Lernens im Kontext Schule; 3.4.1 Drei Ansätze bei der Implementierung von Mobilem Lernen in die (Unter-richts-) Praxis; 3.4.2 Öffnung des Schulunterrichts; 3.4.3 Gegensätze, Widersprüche und Brüche; 3.4.4 Lehrende als Moderatoren
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.4.5 Lernendenperspektive als Chance, Strukturen im Lernprozess zu revidieren3.5 Abschließende Bemerkungen; 3.6 Literatur; 4 Innovation und Trends für Mobiles Lernen; 4.1 Einleitung; 4.2 Expertenstudie zum Mobilen Lernen; 4.3 Trends und Zukunftsperspektiven Mobilen Lernens; 4.3.1 Smartphones als persönliche Lernportale; 4.3.2 Ortsbasierte und kontextsensitive Lerntechnologie; 4.3.3 Mobile Augmented Reality; 4.3.4 Tangible Interfaces und Smart-Objects; 4.3.5 Die Cloud für unterbrechungsfreies Lernen; 4.3.6 Mobile Lernspiele; 4.3.7 Situierte Ambient Displays; 4.4 Diskussion und Ausblick
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.5 Literatur5 Informelles Mobiles Lernen; 5.1 Einleitung; 5.2 Annäherung an informelles Mobiles Lernen; 5.2.1 Informelles Lernen; 5.2.2 Mobiles Lernen; 5.2.3 Informelles Mobiles Lernen; 5.3 Lerntheoretische und didaktische Bezugspunkte zum informellen Mobilen Lernen; 5.3.1 Lerntheoretische Bezugspunkte informellen Mobilen Lernens; 5.3.2 Didaktisch-methodische Ansatzpunkte; 5.3.3 Anwendungsbeispiele informellen Mobilen Lernens; 5.3.4 Möglichkeiten zur Erfassung und Beschreibung informellen MobilenLernens; 5.4 Kritische Betrachtungen; 5.5 Fazit; 5.6 Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Teil II Mobile Learning an Universitäten
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Inhaltstext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 62
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Beneficial Ownership : Basic and Federal Indian Law Aspects of a Concept (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783319016856
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (178 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Parallel Title: Print version Beneficial Ownership : Basic and Federal Indian Law Aspects of a Concept
    DDC: 301
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: The hunt for beneficial owners is on. Like an elephant, the beneficial owner hides in the jungle of complex legal structures, waiting to be discovered by eager prosecutors. But what lies behind this metaphor? What is a Beneficial Owner? Is beneficial ownership a right? What does this right encompass? What is the value of this right compared to other rights? And if beneficial ownership is not a right, is it still a legally relevant relation? How do courts, namely the U.S. Supreme Court deal with the concept? When do Anglo-American judges and European scholars resort to the concept?This book a
    Description / Table of Contents: Acknowledgments; Abbreviations; Contents; Table of Cases; Table of Statutes; Introduction; The Term Beneficial Ownership; 1. About Elephants; a) ``I Know Them When I See Them´´; aa) The Problem with Metaphors; bb) Seeing Elephants v. Seeing Beneficial Owners; cc) Conclusion; b) The Blind Men and the Elephant; aa) The Story; bb) Symbolism for Approaches; 2. Elements of the Analysis; a) Perceptions; aa) What Are Perceptions?; bb) Some Perceptions of Property; cc) Conclusion; b) Functionality; c) History; d) Experience; aa) As a Method; bb) Some Theoretical Aspects of Experience; cc) Conclusions
    Description / Table of Contents: e) Languageaa) Roman Law and Old Common Law; bb) Legal Interest in Nineteenth Century Germany; cc) Conclusions; f) Law and Economics; 3. The Term Beneficial Ownership in the Crosshairs; a) English Version; aa) Beneficial; bb) Ownership; cc) The Combination of Beneficial and Ownership; b) German Version; aa) Wirtschaftlich; bb) Berechtigung; cc) The Combination of Wirtschaftlich and Berechtigung; c) Italian and French; aa) L´ayant droit/l´avente diritto; bb) Economique/Economico; cc) L´ayant droit économique and l´avente diritto economico; d) Observations and Conclusions
    Description / Table of Contents: aa) Regarding Beneficial, Economic, Economico, Wirtschaftlichbb) Regarding Ownership, Droit, Diritto, Berechtigung; cc) Degree of Abstraction; Beneficial Ownership as a Concept; 1. About Concepts in General; 2. HOHFELD´s Fundamental Legal Conceptions; a) Significance of the Conceptions; b) The Conceptions; aa) The Four Hohfeldian Incidents; bb) First and Second Order Incidents; cc) Correlatives; dd) Opposites; ee) Conceptual Definition of Beneficial Ownership; 3. Conclusion; Common Law, Equity, and Beneficial Ownership; 1. Law, Anti-Law,; 2. and Non-Law (Fig.2); 3. Conclusions
    Description / Table of Contents: Beneficial Ownership in U.S. Supreme Court Decisions1. Hellenic Lines, Ltd. v. Rhoditis; 2. Tooahnippah (Goombi) v. Hickel; 3. United States v. Algoma Lumber Co. et al.; 4. United States v. Shoshone Tribe of Indians; 5. Handy and Harman v. Burnet; 6. Chicago, Milwaukee and St. Paul Railway Company v. Des Moines Union Railway Company; 7. Montana Catholic Missions v. Missoula County; a) Significance; b) Facts; c) Definition of Beneficial Ownership; aa) Right to Enjoyment; bb) Recognized by Law; cc) Enforceable by Beneficial Owner or Someone on Her Behalf
    Description / Table of Contents: dd) Separation of Beneficial Use and Legal Titleee) Beneficial Ownership Ad Interim; 8. Wells v. Savannah; 9. Union Stock Yards Bank v. Gillespie; 10. Drexel v. Berney; 11. Laughlin v. Mitchell; a) Contract: Lease; b) Inheritance: Will; c) Equity: Trust; d) Beneficial Ownership; 12. National Bank v. Insurance Company; 13. Summary Findings; Fundamental Aspects of Federal Indian Law; 1. Introductory Note on the Moral Aspect; 2. Why Federal Indian Law?; 3. Cultural Differences; a) Stereotypes; b) Lyng v. Northwest Indian Cemetery; c) Indian Status; d) Diversity and Uniformity
    Description / Table of Contents: 4. Law, Property, and Language
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 63
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Praxishandbuch Interkulturelles Management : Der andere Weg: Affektives Vermitteln interkultureller Kompetenz (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658003289 , 9783658003296
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (256 p)
    Parallel Title: Print version Praxishandbuch Interkulturelles Management : Der andere Weg: Affektives Vermitteln interkultureller Kompetenz
    DDC: 303.4182105
    Keywords: Intercultural communication ; Management ; Social aspects ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Dieses umfassende Praxishandbuch befähigt den Leser, zukünftig interkulturelle Trainings inhaltlich und ablauforganisatorisch kulturadäquat zu konzipieren, durchzuführen und nachzubereiten. Und es vermittelt interkulturelle Kompetenz, im Besonderen fördert es ein vertieftes Verständnis für die Vielfalt von Kulturen und die Bereitschaft, sich selbst in einem lebenslangen Lern- und Persönlichkeitsentwicklungsprozess zu sehen. Die erfahrenen Autoren vermitteln die Inhalte fundiert, anschaulich und praxisorientiert. ?
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort; Inhaltsverzeichnis; 1 Einführung in das Handbuch und in die Thematik; 1.1Das westliche Paradigma in einer globalisierten Welt; 1.2Warum ist das Interkulturelle so wichtig?; 1.3Für wen ist dieses Handbuch gedacht?; 1.4Wie ist dieses Handbuch aufgebaut?; 1.5Wie können Sie sich dieses Handbuch für Ihre Zwecke erschließen?; 2 Interkulturelle Kompetenz und affektiver Zugang: die andere Sichtweise; 2.1Was ist Kultur?; 2.2Eine allgemein verständliche Begriffsdefinition von Kultur für unsere Arbeit; 2.2.1Kernwerte und Lebensstile; 2.3Die Arbeit mit Nationalkulturen: Reduktion der Komplexität
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4Was ist interkulturelle Kompetenz?2.5Auswirkungen interkultureller Differenzen in der Kommunikation und im Handeln?; 2.6Vom kognitiven zum affektiven Lehren und Lernen; 2.6.1Kognitives und affektives Lernen; 2.6.2Was heißt dies für den Aufbau dieses Buches?; 2.6.3Die Besonderheit der Trainer- und Moderatorensituation; 2.7Die innere Haltung als Basis eines affektiven Zugangs zu anderen Kulturen; 2.7.1Zwei richtige Sichtweisen auf Afrika; 2.7.2Der positive Weg als Schlüssel zum Beziehungsaufbau; 2.8Der erste Schritt: sich der Wirkung der eigenen Kultur auf andere bewusst werden
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.9Die Erkennung von Stereotypen als Basis für die Selbsterkenntnis2.10Zusammenfassung: Wie können Kommunikationsbarrieren überwunden werden?; Bibliografie; 3 Der Zugang zu anderen Kulturen: Wege und Möglichkeiten; 3.1Geschichte, geografische und klimatische Rahmenbedingungen; 3.1.1Prägung durch historische Erfahrungen; 3.1.1.1Beispiel Deutschland: die jüngere Geschichte; 3.1.1.2Beispiel Belgien und Schweiz: Fremd- und Selbstbestimmung bei ähnlicher Bevölkerungsstruktur; 3.1.2Topografische und klimatische Rahmenbedingungen; 3.2Die Hofstede-Indizes; 3.2.1Machtdistanz und Individualität
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.1.1Umgang mit unterschiedlicher Machtdistanz am Beispiel Russland und DeutschlandWas heißt das zusammengefasst?; 3.2.1.2Verhaltensweisen in der Praxis bei unterschiedlicher Machtdistanz; 3.2.1.3Auswirkungen der Individualität vor dem Hintergrund unterschiedlicher Machtdistanz: Beispiel Frankreich und Deutschland; 3.2.2Weitere Hofstede-Indizes: Maskulinität und Vermeidung von Unsicherheit; 3.2.2.1Maskulinität; 3.2.2.2Vermeidung von Unsicherheit; 3.3ICH und WIR: zwei gegensätzliche Weltbilder; 3.3.1Das westliche Weltbild des ICH
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.3.2Die ganzheitliche WIR-Betrachtungsweise Asiens und islamischer Kulturen3.3.3Der Einfluss des WIR und ICH auf das Geschäftsleben; 3.3.4Welches Weltbild ist besser?; 3.3.5Recht oder richtig?; 3.3.6Informationsvermittlung und Planung der Zusammenarbeit in WIR-Kulturen am Beispiel Asien; 3.4Beziehungsqualität und Beziehungsnetze; 3.4.1Die Dimension Zeit; 3.4.2Gemeinsinn und Gemeinwohl; 3.4.3Gesicht geben und wahren als integraler Bestandteil von Beziehungen in WIR-Kulturen; 3.4.4Schuld eingestehen und Scham annehmen; 3.4.5Eigen- und Fremdbestimmung, Ausmaß soziale Kontrolle
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.5Erziehung und Kommunikationsverhalten
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltstext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 64
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Praxiswissen Online-Marketing : Affiliate- und E-Mail-Marketing, Suchmaschinenmarketing, Online-Werbung, Social Media, Online-PR (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658033125
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (356 p)
    Edition: 4th ed
    Parallel Title: Print version Praxiswissen Online-Marketing
    DDC: 302.2
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Die wichtigsten Instrumente für profitables Marketing im Internet Marketing-Instrumente erfolgreich nutzen und sinnvoll kombinieren Mit aktuellen Links, ergänzenden Videos und Screencasts im Blog zum Buch
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort; Vorwort zur 3. Auflage; Vorwort zur 2. Auflage; Vorwort zur 1. Auflage; Inhaltsverzeichnis; EinführungDefinition, Begriffsabgrenzung undEntwicklung des Online-Marketings in denvergangenen 17 Jahren; 1 Einführung; 1.1 Was Sie von diesem Buch erwarten dürfen - und was nicht; 1.2 Definition und Abgrenzung; 1.2.1 Der Begriff „Online-Marketing"; 1.2.2 Der Blickwinkel der traditionellen Marketing-Autoren; 1.2.3 Die Betrachtung modernerer Autoren; 1.2.4 Die Betrachtung der aktuellen Literatur; 1.2.5 Ableitung und Definition; 1.2.6 Weitere Begriffsabgrenzungen in Kurzform
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.2.7 Einordnung: Web 2.0, Social-Media-Marketing und Mobile-Marketing1.3 Entwicklung des Online-Marketings in Zahlen; 1.3.1 Affiliate-Marketing; 1.3.2 E-Mail-Marketing; 1.3.3 Keyword-Advertising; 1.3.4 Online-Werbung; 1.3.5 Suchmaschinenoptimierung; Affiliate-Marketing Hintergründe, Funktionsprinzipien und Formen des Affiliate-Marketings; 2 Affiliate-Marketing; 2.1 Affiliate-Marketing: Hintergrundwissen; 2.2 Definition und Begriffsabgrenzung; 2.3 Funktionsprinzip; 2.3.1 Tracking-Methoden; 2.4 Unterschiedliche Formen des Affiliate Marketings; 2.5 Marktentwicklung in Zahlen
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.6 Affiliate-Marketing in der Praxis2.7 Provisionsmodelle: Benötigt wird ein Anreiz; 2.7.1 Pay per Sale; 2.7.2 Pay per Lead; 2.7.3 Pay per Click; 2.7.4 Pay per E-Mail; 2.7.5 Lifetime-Provision; 2.7.6 Zwei-oder mehrstufige Vergütungsmodelle; 2.7.7 Mischformen; 2.8 Werbemittel; 2.8.1 Text-Links; 2.8.2 Banner und Buttons der verschiedensten Arten und Größen; 2.8.3 Produktdatenbank als CSV-Datei; 2.8.4 Produktdatenbank über XML-Schnittstelle; 2.8.5 Smart-Content; 2.8.6 Formulare; 2.8.7 Video-Ads; 2.8.8 Page-Peel; 2.8.9 Keywords; 2.9 Affiliate-Marketing über Netzwerke
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.9.1 Welches Netzwerk ist das Richtige?2.9.2 Meta-Netzwerke; 2.10 Affiliate-Marketing in Eigenregie; 2.10.1 Partnerprogramm-Software; 2.10.2 Juristische Aspekte; 2.10.3 Praxisbeispiele für Vermarktung in Eigenregie; 2.11 Vermarktungsstrategie für das Partnerprogramm; 2.11.1 Anbieter von Partnerprogramm-Verzeichnissen; 2.11.2 Die wichtigsten deutschsprachigen Verzeichnisse; 2.12 Zusammenfassung; E-Mail-Marketing Hintergründe, Formen undProblemstellungen des E-Mail-Marketings; 3 E-Mail-Marketing; 3.1 E-Mail-Marketing: Hintergrundwissen; 3.2 Definition und Begriffsabgrenzung
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.1 Stand-Alone-Kampagne/E-Mailings3.2.2 Newsletter; 3.2.3 Newsletter-Sponsorship; 3.2.4 Enhanced Newsletter; 3.2.5 E-Mail-Responder; 3.3 Problemstellungen des E-Mail-Marketings; 3.3.1 Das Spamfilter- und Blacklist-Problem; 3.3.2 Inhaltliche und konzeptionelle Problemstellungen; 3.3.3 Technische Problemstellungen; 3.3.4 Juristische Problemstellungen; 3.4 Der Markt in Zahlen; 3.5 E-Mail-Marketing in der Praxis; 3.5.1 Was wird für professionelles E-Mail-Marketing benötigt?; 3.6 Versendetag und -Frequenz; 3.7 Besonderheiten des E-Mail-Marketings für Online-Shops
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.8 Dienstleister oder Eigenregie?
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 65
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Disentangling migration and climate change : methodologies, political discourses and human rights (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400762084
    Language: English
    Pages: 1 Online-Ressource
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Disentangling migration and climate change
    DDC: 304.81
    RVK:
    LB 56000
    RVK:
    MS 3600
    RVK:
    RB 10594
    RVK:
    UT 8900
    Keywords: Klimawandel ; Soziale Folgen ; Internationale Migration ; Menschenrechte ; Umweltschutz ; Welt ; Climatic changes ; Social aspects.. ; Emigration and immigration ; Social aspects.. ; Emigration and immigration ; Environmental aspects ; Electronic books ; Population geography ; Climatic changes ; Environmental aspects ; Human ecology ; Konferenzschrift ; Klimaänderung ; Internationale Migration ; Aufsatzsammlung
    Abstract: This book examines the inter-relationship between climate change and migration. It focuses on planned relocation as a policy response to environmentally induced forced migration and analyzes human rights to protect people threatened by environmental change.
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 66
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Engineering Education for Social Justice : Critical Explorations and Opportunities (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400763500
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VI, 290 p. 15 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Philosophy of Engineering and Technology 10
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    Keywords: Philosophy (General) ; Technology Philosophy ; Education Philosophy ; Humanities ; Philosophy ; Philosophy (General) ; Technology Philosophy ; Education Philosophy ; Humanities ; Ingenieurstudium ; Soziale Gerechtigkeit ; Technikphilosophie
    Abstract: Hoping to help transform engineering into a more socially just field of practice, this book offers various perspectives and strategies while highlighting key concepts and themes that help readers understand the complex relationship between engineering education and social justice. This volume tackles topics and scopes ranging from the role of Buddhism in socially just engineering to the blinding effects of ideologies in engineering to case studies on the implications of engineered systems for social justice. This book aims to serve as a framework for interventions or strategies to make social justice more visible in engineering education and enhance scholarship in the emerging field of Engineering and Social Justice (ESJ). This creates a ‘toolbox’ for engineering educators and students to make social justice a central theme in engineering education
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Part I: Introduction to Engineering Education and Engineering for Social Justice (ESJ); Chapter 1: Introduction; 1.1 Who Is This Book For?; 1.2 Motivations for Putting This Book Together; 1.3 Historic Convergence of Circumstances; 1.3.1 Calls for Change; 1.3.2 An (In)Visible History; 1.4 Defining Social Justice; 1.5 How This Book Approaches ESJ: Autobiographical, Historical, Philosophical, Pedagogical, Practical and Beyond; References; Part II: Where Have We Been? Where Can We Go?; Chapter 2: Engineering, Social Justice, and Peace: Strategies for Educational and Professional Reform
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1 Introduction2.2 Background: A Short History of ESJP; 2.3 Methods and Scope; 2.4 Educational Reform Strategies; 2.4.1 Pedagogical Initiatives; 2.4.1.1 Liberal-Education Courses; 2.4.1.2 Technical Course Modules; 2.4.1.3 Critical Learning Thresholds; 2.4.1.4 Experiential Learning; 2.4.1.5 Liberative Pedagogies; 2.4.2 Curricular Initiatives; 2.4.2.1 Structuring General Education Content; 2.4.2.2 Social and Technical Integration in Engineering Design; 2.4.3 Institutional Initiatives; 2.5 Professional Reform Strategies; 2.5.1 Networking; 2.5.2 Re-conceptualizing "Engineering"; 2.6 Conclusions
    Description / Table of Contents: ReferencesChapter 3: Power. Systems. Engineering. Traveling Lines of Resistance in Academic Institutions; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Thermo as Usual; 3.2.1 Thermo and Gnosticism: A Tale of Two Esoteric Subjects; 3.2.2 Learning to Stay and Fight: Lessons from Social Justice; 3.3 Transformative Processes; 3.3.1 First Attempts; 3.3.2 Teaching About Power; 3.3.3 Epistemology: Teaching Material and Its Critique; 3.3.4 Book Project; 3.4 Institutional Obstacles; 3.4.1 Obstacles; 3.4.2 Students and Faculty; 3.5 How I Got Away with It (So Far); 3.6 Conclusion; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Part III: Conceptual Contributions to ESJChapter 4: The (Mis)Framing of Social Justice: Why Ideologies of Depoliticization and Meritocracy Hinder Engineers' Ability to Think About Social Injustices; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Cultural Ideologies in Engineering; 4.3 Depoliticization of Engineering; 4.4 The Ideology of Meritocracy; 4.5 Misframing Social Justice Issues; 4.5.1 Non-dominant and Dominant Groups Adopt These Ideologies; 4.6 The Insufficiency of One Lecture or One Essay: The Task of Reframing; 4.7 Conclusion; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 5: What Can Buddhism Offer to a Socially Just Engineering Education?5.1 Introduction; 5.2 The Practice of the Six Virtues of the Bodhisattva Path; 5.2.1 Generosity; 5.2.2 Ethics; 5.2.3 Patience; 5.2.4 Perseverance; 5.2.5 Mindfulness; 5.2.6 Wisdom; 5.3 The Practice of the Six Virtues and Leadership Theory; 5.4 Three-Level Model of Leadership Based on Buddhism 12; 5.4.1 First Level: Actions to Benefit Oneself; 5.4.2 Second Level: Actions to Benefit Others; 5.4.3 Third Level: Interrelated Benefits; 5.5 Implementing the Framework in a Pre-college Engineering Case Scenario
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.5.1 Description of the Scenario
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6350-0
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 67
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Resilience Thinking in Urban Planning (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400754768 , 1283910845 , 9781283910842
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIV, 249 p. 13 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: GeoJournal Library 106
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T.
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Regional planning ; Architecture ; Regional economics ; Human Geography ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Regional planning ; Architecture ; Regional economics ; Human Geography
    Abstract: There is consensus in literature that urban areas have become increasingly vulnerable to the outcomes of economic restructuring under the neoliberal political economic ideology. The increased frequency and widening diversity of problems offer evidence that the socio-economic and spatial policies, planning and practices introduced under the neoliberal agenda can no longer be sustained. As this shortfall was becoming more evident among urban policymakers, planners, and researchers in different parts of the world, a group of discontent researchers began searching for new approaches to addressing the increasing vulnerabilities of urban systems in the wake of growing socio-economic and ecological problems. This book is the joint effort of those who have long felt that contemporary planning systems and policies are inadequate in preparing cities for the future in an increasingly neoliberalising world. It argues that resilience thinking can form the basis of an alternative approach to planning. Drawing upon case studies from five cities in Europe, namely Lisbon, Porto, Istanbul, Stockholm, and Rotterdam, the book makes an exploration of the resilience perspective, raising a number of theoretical debates, and suggesting a new methodological approach based on empirical evidence. This book provides insights for intellectuals exploring alternative perspectives and principles of a new planning approach
    Abstract: There is consensus in literature that urban areas have become increasingly vulnerable to the outcomes of economic restructuring under the neoliberal political economic ideology. The increased frequency and widening diversity of problems offer evidence that the socio-economic and spatial policies, planning and practices introduced under the neoliberal agenda can no longer be sustained. As this shortfall was becoming more evident among urban policymakers, planners, and researchers in different parts of the world, a group of discontent researchers began searching for new approaches to addressing the increasing vulnerabilities of urban systems in the wake of growing socio-economic and ecological problems. This book is the joint effort of those who have long felt that contemporary planning systems and policies are inadequate in preparing cities for the future in an increasingly neoliberalising world. It argues that “resilience thinking” can form the basis of an alternative approach to planning. Drawing upon case studies from five cities in Europe, namely Lisbon, Porto, Istanbul, Stockholm, and Rotterdam, the book makes an exploration of the resilience perspective, raising a number of theoretical debates, and suggesting a new methodological approach based on empirical evidence. This book provides insights for intellectuals exploring alternative perspectives and principles of a new planning approach.
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 1: Introduction: Resilience Thinking in Urban Planning: Ayda Eraydin and Tuna Taşan-Kok -- Chapter 2: “Resilience Thinking” for Planning: Ayda Eraydin -- Chapter 3: Conceptual Overview of Resilience: History and Context: Tuna Taşan-Kok, Dominic Stead and Peiwen Lu -- Chapter 4: Urban Resilience and Spatial Dynamics: Sara Santos Cruz,  João Pedro Costa, Silvia Ávila de Sousa and Paulo Pinho -- Chaper 5: Analysing the Socio-spatial Vulnerability to Drivers of Globalisation in Lisbon, Oporto, Istanbul, Stockholm and Rotterdam: Tuna Taşan-Kok and Dominic Stead -- Chapter 6: Systems, Cultures, Styles: Spatial Planning in Portugal, Turkey, Sweden and the Netherlands: Sofia Morgado and Luís Dias -- Chapter 7: Managing Urban Change in Five European Urban Agglomerations: Key Policy Documents and Institutional Frameworks: Peter Schmitt -- Chapter 8: Evaluating Resilience in Planning: Paulo Pinho, Vítor Oliveira and Ana Martins -- Chapter 9: Assessing Urban Resilience in the Metropolitan Area of Lisbon: the Case of Alcântara: Luís Dias, Sofia Morgado and João Pedro Costa -- Chapter 10: Evaluating Urban Policies from a Resilient Perspective: The Case of Oporto: Vítor Oliveira, Ana Martins and Sara Santos Cruz -- Chapter 11: The Evaluation of Different Processes of Spatial Development from a Resilience Perspective in Istanbul: Ayda Eraydin, Ali Türel and Deniz Altay Kaya -- Chapter 12: Urban Resilience and Polycentricity - the Case of the Stockholm Urban Agglomeration: Peter Schmitt, Lisbeth Greve Harbo, Asli Tepecik Diş and Anu Henriksson -- Chapter 13: Urban Resilience, Climate Change and Land-Use Planning in Rotterdam: Dominic  Stead and Tuna Taşan-Kok -- Chapter 14: The Evaluation of Findings and Future of Resilience Thinking in Planning: Ayda Eraydin and Tuna Taşan-Kok -- Index..
    Note: Includes index , Introduction: Resilience Thinking in Urban Planning , "Resilience Thinking" for Planning , Conceptual Overview of Resilience: History and Context , Urban Resilience and Spatial Dynamics , Analysing the Socio-Spatial Vulnerability to Drivers of Globalisation in Lisbon, Oporto, Istanbul, Stockholm and Rotterdam , Systems, Cultures and Styles: Spatial Planning in Portugal, Turkey, Sweden and the Netherlands , Managing Urban Change in Five European Urban Agglomerations: Key Policy Documents and Institutional Frameworks , Evaluating Resilience in Planning , Assessing Urban Resilience in the Metropolitan Area of Lisbon: The Case of Alcântara , Evaluating Urban Policies from a Resilience Perspective: The Case of Oporto , The Evaluation of Different Processes of Spatial Development from a Resilience Perspective in Istanbul , Urban Resilience and Polycentricity: The Case of the Stockholm Urban Agglomeration , Urban Resilience, Climate Change and Land-Use Planning in Rotterdam , The Evaluation of Findings and Future of Resilience Thinking in Planning
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-5476-8
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 68
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Web of Violence : Exploring Connections Among Different Forms of Interpersonal Violence and Abuse (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400755963
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 108 p. 3 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerBriefs in Sociology
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Hamby, Sherry L. The web of violence
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Public health ; Quality of Life ; Social sciences Methodology ; Quality of Life Research ; Psychology, clinical ; Developmental psychology ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Public health ; Quality of Life ; Social sciences Methodology ; Quality of Life Research ; Psychology, clinical ; Developmental psychology ; Gewalttätigkeit ; Risikofaktor ; Korrelation
    Abstract: There is an increasing appreciation of the interconnections among all forms of violence. These interconnections have critical implications for conducting research that can produce valid conclusions about the causes and consequences of abuse, maltreatment, and trauma. The accumulated data on co-occurrence also provide strong evidence that prevention and intervention should be organized around the full context of individuals’ experiences, not narrowly defined subtypes of violence. Managing the flood of new research and practice innovations is a challenge, however. New means of communication and integration are needed to meet this challenge, and the Web of Violence is intended to contribute to this process by serving as a concise overview of the conceptual and empirical work that form a basis for understanding the interconnections across forms of violence throughout the lifespan. It also offers ideas and directions for prevention, intervention, and public policy.A number of initiatives are emerging to integrate the findings on co-occurrence into research and action. The American Psychological Association established a new journal, Psychology of Violence, which is a forum for research on all types of violence. Sherry Hamby is the founding editor and John Grych is associate editor and co-editor of a special issue on the co-occurrence of violence in 2012. Dr. Hamby also is a co-investigator of the National Survey of Children’s Exposure to Violence (NatSCEV), which has drawn attention to polyvictimization. Polyvictimization is a focus of the U.S. Department of Justice’s Defending Childhood Initiative and has recently been featured in calls for grant proposals by the Office of Victims of Crime and National Institutes for Justice.
    Description / Table of Contents: 〈p〉Chapter 1: The Case for Studying Co-Occurrence -- Chapter 2:  Tracing the Threads of the Web: The Epidemiology of Interconnections among Forms of Violence & Victimization -- Chapter 3:  The Causes of Interconnection -- Chapter 4:  A Developmental Perspective on Interconnection -- Chapter 5:  Implications for Research: Toward a more comprehensive understanding of interpersonal violence -- Chapter 6 Implications for Prevention & Intervention: A More Person-Centered Approach -- Chapter 7   Conclusion: Toppling the Silos.〈/p〉.
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-5596-3
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 69
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Digitale Jugendkulturen (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531184869
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (322 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Digitale Kultur und Kommunikation
    Series Statement: Digitale Kultur und Kommunikation Ser. v.2
    Parallel Title: Print version Digitale Jugendkulturen
    DDC: 305.235
    Keywords: Internet and teenagers.. ; Mass media and youth.. ; Youth ; Social life and customs.. ; Digital media ; Social aspects ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Jugend ist gegenwärtig nicht nur Offline-Jugend, sondern zugleich Online-Jugend. Auch die in diesem Band im Mittelpunkt stehenden jugendkulturellen Vergemeinschaftungsformen, in deren Rahmen sich Jugendliche selbst darstellen, mit ihrer Identität auseinandersetzen und soziales Miteinander von Gleichgesinnten finden können 'sei es HipHop, Gothic, Techno oder sei es neuerdings die Emo- oder Visual Kei-Szene' sind heute nicht mehr denkbar ohne ihre Erweiterungen im Internet. Insofern sind Jugendkulturen immer auch digitale Jugendkulturen. Freilich nutzen nicht alle jugendkulturellen Gesellunge
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Vorwort; Digitale Jugendkulturen; 1. Mediatisierung und Nutzung digitaler Medien durch Jugendliche; 2. Die sozialwissenschaftlichen Diskurse über digitale Jugendkulturen; 3. Abschied von der Netz-Generation; Literatur; I. Kommunikative und kreative Praktiken; Jugendkulturen im Zeitalter der Mediatisierung; 1. Einleitung; 2. Kommunikative Konstitution von Jugendkulturen; 3. Jugendkulturen in mediatisierten Sozialwelten; 4. Fazit und Ausblick; Literatur; Vom Hipster zum Black Metal: True vs. Fake auf YouTube und flickr; 1. YouTube-Research: Clipkategorien
    Description / Table of Contents: 2. POSER, CASTING und DATING: Suchbegriffe für die jugendliche Selbstdarstellung auf YouTube?3. Jugendliche Bild-Gesten als Starpose: Gaahl=Satan; 4. Jugend-Bilder im Web 2.0 als mimetische Selbstdarstellung; Quellen; Anhang; Wenn Spieler Spiele umschreiben; 1. Einleitung; 2. Produktive Umgangsformen mit digitalen Medien; 3. Das Phänomen »Modding«; 4. Modding als manipulative Medienpraxis; 5. Total Conversions am Beispiel Counter-Strike; 6. Soziale Organisation von TC-Teams; 7. Ein Ausblick auf die manipulative Jugend; Literatur; Bildhandeln und Bildkommunikation in Social Network Sites
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Neue bunte Bilderwelten?2. Jugendkulturelle Selbststilisierung gestern und Bildhandeln heute; 3. Die Plastizität des digitalen Bilds; 4. Bilder im (digital) vernetzten, »gläsernen« Archiv; 5. Multilokale Präsenz und Erweiterung des Blick- und Aktionsfeldes; 6. Bilder als Kristallisationspunkt jugendkultureller Vergemeinschaftung; 7. Zusammenfassung und Fazit; Literatur; Zu den Künsten einer JugendKunstOnline: FanArt; 1. Der aktuelle FanArt Turn; 2. Animexx, deviantART und MangaCarta; 3. Dockingstation Kunst; 4. Zur »Kunstnähe« von FanArt; 4.1 Zeichner, Artwork und Galerien
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2 Kategorien, Stile und Bewertungskriterien5. Zu »genuinen« Fan-Künsten; 5.1 Collaborations und Oekaki; 5.3 Tutorials und Wettbewerbe; 6. Zu Ambivalenzen von FanArt & Kunst; Literatur; Medienkonvergente Interaktionen - Jugendliche im medialen Netz; 1. Einführung; 2. Medien - Nutzung - Konvergenz; 3. KünstlerInnen in den Medien als Ereignis und Media Spectacle; 4. Medienkonvergente Interaktionen - Jugendliche im medialen Netz; 5. Konklusionen; Literatur; II. Identitätssuche und Selbstsozialisation; Digitale Medien - Jugendkulturen - Identität
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Leben im Plural: Identitätsbildung in der Multioptionsgesellschaft2. Jugendund Medienkulturen als Bühnen der Selbstdarstellung; 3. Identitätsinszenierungen im Internet - zwei Fallbeispiele; 3.1 Online-Rollenspieler: Imaginierte Ich-Inszenierungen und Identitätsexperimente in virtuellen Räumen; 3.2 Zwischen Individualität und Konformität: Selbstdarstellungen und soziale Beziehungen auf Facebook; 4. Fazit: Identitätsarbeit online als performative Selbstinszenierung; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Girls Media - Feminist Media: Identitätsfindung, Selbstermächtigung und Solidarisierung von Mädchen und Frauen in virtuellen Räu
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 70
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The web of violence : exploring connections among different forms of interpersonal violence and abuse (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400755963
    Language: English
    Pages: ix, 108 p. , ill.
    DDC: 306.85
    Keywords: Violence ; Interpersonal conflict ; Electronic books
    Note: Includes bibliographical references
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/978-94-007-5596-3
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    HBZ
  • 71
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Demographic Change and Housing Wealth : Home-owners, Pensions and Asset-based Welfare in Europe (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400743847 , 1283612283 , 9781283612289
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XV, 161 p. 21 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Doling, John, 1946 - Demographic change and housing wealth
    DDC: 363.583094
    RVK:
    MS 1460
    Keywords: Grundeigentum ; Altersvorsorge ; Sparen ; Privater Haushalt ; Vergleich ; Ostasien ; Europa ; Social sciences ; Geography ; Population ; Demography ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Geography ; Population ; Demography ; Home ownership ; Economic aspects ; European Union countries ; Home ownership ; Social aspects ; European Union countries ; Population aging ; Economic aspects ; European Union countries ; Population aging ; Social aspects ; European Union countries ; Pensions ; European Union countries ; Public welfare ; European Union countries ; Europäische Union ; Grundeigentum ; Wirtschaftliche Lage ; Soziale Situation ; Hauseigentümer
    Abstract: Across the EU, populations are shrinking and ageing. An increasing burden is being placed on a smaller working population to generate the taxes required for pensions and care costs. Welfare states are weakening in many countries and across Europe, households are being increasingly expected to plan for their retirement and future care needs within this risky environment. At the same time, the proportion of people buying their own home in most countries has risen, so that some two-thirds of European households now own their homes.  Housing equity now considerably exceeds total European GDP. This book discusses questions like: to what extent might home ownership provide a potential cure for some of the consequences of ageing populations by realizing housing equity in order to meet the consumption needs of older people? What does this mean for patterns of inheritance and longer-term inequalities across Europe? And to what extent are governments banking on their citizens utilising their housing wealth now and in the future?
    Description / Table of Contents: Demographic Change and Housing Wealth; Foreword; Acknowledgements; Contents; Chapter 1: Issues and Approaches; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Demographic and Housing Developments: Policy Challenges; 1.2.1 Demographic Change; 1.2.2 An Increasing Number of Homeowners; 1.2.3 Housing Asset-Based Welfare; 1.2.3.1 Asset-Based Welfare; 1.2.3.2 Housing as Pension; 1.3 Saving Through Housing: A Theoretical Framework; 1.3.1 The Life Cycle Model; 1.3.2 The Welfare System; 1.3.3 The Family; 1.3.4 Other Mechanisms; 1.3.5 The Mixed Economy of Saving; 1.3.5.1 Financial Institutions; 1.3.6 The Role of Housing
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.3.6.1 Housing and the Life Cycle Model1.3.6.2 Income Derived from Homeownership; 1.3.7 Cross-Country Variations; 1.4 Methodologies for Researching the Three Questions; 1.4.1 Selection of Cases; 1.4.1.1 Economic and Financial Crisis; 1.5 Content and Structure of the Book; Chapter 2: Homeownership Rates; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Homeownership Across Countries and Time; 2.3 Homeownership Rates and Welfare: A Trade-Off?; 2.3.1 Homeownership and Social Spending; 2.3.2 Homeownership and Welfare Regimes; 2.4 The Drivers of the Homeownership Decision; 2.4.1 Housing Finance
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4.1.1 Funding of Mortgage Loans2.4.1.2 The Innovation in Loan Products; 2.4.2 The Relative Attractions of Home Owning and Renting; 2.4.2.1 Tax Policy and Other Subsidies for Homeownership; 2.4.2.2 Declining Support for Social Housing; 2.4.2.3 Increase of Homeownership; 2.4.2.4 Changes in Rental Housing Sectors; 2.4.2.5 Household Decision Making; 2.4.3 Household Characteristics; 2.4.3.1 Income; 2.4.3.2 Age; 2.4.4 Combining the Factors; 2.5 Conclusions; Chapter 3: Housing Wealth in the Household Portfolio; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Household Wealth; 3.2.1 How Much Wealth Do Households Have?
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.2 How Much Wealth Is Held in Housing?3.2.3 What Influences the Size and Composition of Wealth?; 3.2.3.1 Quantitative Studies; 3.2.3.2 Qualitative studies; 3.2.3.3 Portfolio Analysis; 3.2.3.4 Regression Analysis; 3.3 Housing Debt; 3.3.1 What Influences the Size of Household Debt?; 3.3.1.1 Quantitative Studies; 3.3.1.2 Qualitative Studies; Why Do People Have a Mortgage?; Priority Placed on Paying Off Mortgage Compared to Other Priorities; 3.3.1.3 Explaining the Level of New Mortgage Debt; 3.4 Conclusions; Chapter 4: Housing Asset Strategies for Old Age; 4.1 Introduction
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2 Perceptions of the Adequacy of Pensions4.2.1 Variations in Pension Systems; 4.2.2 Concerns About Pension Adequacy; 4.3 Using Housing Equity in Old Age: Strategies in Principle; 4.4 Using Housing Equity in Old Age: Strategies in Practice; 4.4.1 Using Non-housing Assets; 4.4.2 Using Housing Equity; 4.4.3 Dissaving Housing Assets by Moving; 4.4.4 Dissaving Housing Assets but Not Moving; 4.4.4.1 Reverse Mortgages; 4.4.4.2 Interest-Only Loans; 4.4.4.3 Reverse Mortgage Strategies; 4.4.5 Not Dissaving; 4.4.5.1 Housing Equity as a Precaution; 4.4.5.2 Housing Equity as a Bequest
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.4.6 Changing Attitudes
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4384-7
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 72
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Multiple Representations in Biological Education (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400741928
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVII, 390 p. 131 illus, digital)
    Edition: Online-Ausg. Electronic reproduction; Available via World Wide Web
    Series Statement: Models and Modeling in Science Education 7
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    DDC: 570.71
    RVK:
    WB 4049
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: This new publication in the Models and Modeling in Science Education series synthesizes a wealth of international research on using multiple representations in biology education and aims for a coherent framework in using them to improve higher-order learning. Addressing a major gap in the literature, the volume proposes a theoretical model for advancing biology educators' notions of how multiple external representations (MERs) such as analogies, metaphors and visualizations can best be harnessed for improving teaching and learning in biology at all pedagogical levels. The content tackles the c
    Description / Table of Contents: Multiple Representations in Biological Education; Foreword; Preface; References; Contents; Contributors; Part I: Role of Multiple Representations in Learning Biology; Chapter 1: Introduction to Multiple Representations: Their Importance in Biology and Biological Education; Seeking a Unifying Theoretical Framework for Learning with Multiple Representations; MERs and Their Pedagogical Functions; Learning with MERs; Functional Taxonomy of Multiple Representations; Costs of Learning with MERs; Dimensions of Multiple External Representations (MERs) for Biological Science; Modes of Representations
    Description / Table of Contents: Levels of RepresentationsDomain Knowledge of Biology; A Theoretical Model for Interpreting Learning with MERs in Biology; Examining and Interpreting the Chapters with the Cube Model; Learning Through Translations Across MERs; Limitations of the Cube Model; Mesocosmic Representations; Anthropocentric or Human-Centered Representations; Systems Representations; Learning New Biology with MERs in the Twenty-First Century; References; Chapter 2: Identifying and Developing Students´ Ability to Reason with Concepts and Representations in Biology; Introduction; Description of the CRM Model
    Description / Table of Contents: Using the CRM Model to Classify Expert Ways of ReasoningUsing the CRM Model to Guide the Assessment and Interpretation of ERs; Using the CRM Model to Analyze Student Difficulties for the Nature and Potential Source of Unsound Reasoning; Reasoning Difficulties with an ER of the Cardiac Cycle; Reasoning Difficulties with Symbolism in Molecular Biology; Reasoning Difficulties with an ER of the Structure of Immunoglobulin G (IgG); Reasoning Difficulties with Metabolic Pathways Occurring in Cells; Application of the CRM Model to the Design of Remediation Strategies; Conclusion; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 3: Pictures in Biology EducationIntroduction; Pictures in the Continuum of Inscriptions; Pictures in Printed and Online Media; Analysis of Photographs in High School Textbooks; Pictures in Lectures; Social Origin of Picture Content; Scientists Learn to Read Photographic Images; Implications for Biology Curriculum; Appendix: Transcription Conventions; References; Chapter 4: Possible Constraints of Visualization in Biology: Challenges in Learning with Multiple Representations; Introduction; Need for Effective Visualizations in the Biology Domain; Decorations; Diet and Cholesterol
    Description / Table of Contents: Opening Page of Book ChaptersModels; A 3-D Model of Human Anatomy; A 3-D Model of Respiratory System Function; Self-Generated Model of Respiratory System Structure; A Live Ecosystem Model: The Aquarium; Scales; Size Scales; Temporal Scales; Temporal Changes in Structures; Superficial Interpretation of Familiar, Common Representations; Teachers´ Representations on the Classroom Board; Some Final Words; References; Chapter 5: Promoting the Collaborative Use of Cognitive and Metacognitive Skills Through Conceptual Representations in Hypermedia; Introduction; Theoretical Framework
    Description / Table of Contents: Hypermedia as Representational Tools
    Note: Description based upon print version of record , Electronic reproduction; Available via World Wide Web
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4192-8
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 73
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Zwischen Reformeifer und Ernüchterung : Ãœbergänge in beruflichen Lebensläufen (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783658012953
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (208 p)
    Parallel Title: Print version Zwischen Reformeifer und Ernüchterung : Ãœbergänge in beruflichen Lebensläufen
    DDC: 306.3
    RVK:
    DL 3000
    RVK:
    MS 2600
    RVK:
    MS 7750
    RVK:
    QV 240
    Keywords: School-to-work transition ; Vocational education ; Electronic books ; Electronic books ; Konferenzschrift 2012
    Abstract: Bei der Frage der Reformierung des Übergangssystems können wir auf eine über drei Jahrzehnte dauernde Geschichte zurückblicken. Als temporäres Unterstützungsangebot gedacht, zeugen Begriffe wie 'Maßnahmedschungel' und 'Warteschleife' von einer Ernüchterung hinsichtlich der Realisierung von Reformansprüchen beim Übergang von der Schule in die Ausbildung. Dennoch ist der Reformeifer nach wie vor ungebrochen. Die Vielzahl an Programmen und Initiativen signalisieren nicht nur ein wachsendes Problembewusstsein, sondern auch, dass nicht zuletzt durch die Reformen der Reformbedarf steigt. A
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Zwischen Reformeifer und Ernüchterung: Übergänge in beruflichen Lebensläufen; Abstract; 1. Das Übergangssystem als Maßnahmen- und Reformdscbungel; 2. Neue Qualität in der Debatte um Reformen des Übergangssystems; Literatur; Zur Bedeutung und künftigen Entwicklung des Übergangsbereiches - Welche Informationen liefert die integrierte Ausbildungsberichterstattung (iABE)?; Abstract; 1. Ausgangslage; 2. Ausbildungsmarkt und Übergangsprobleme; 3. Datenlage zum Übergangsbereich:Die integrierte Ausbildungsbericbterstattung (iADE)
    Description / Table of Contents: 4. Der Übergangsbereich im Vergleich der anderen Bildungssektoren5. Künftige Entwicklung des Übergangsbereiches; 6. Fazit; Literatur; Ausdifferenzierung von Übergangswegen von der Schule in dieAusbildung. Ergebnisse aus Längsschnittstudien des DJI; Abstract; 1. Ausgangssituation; 2. FragesteUungen; 3. Datengrundlage; 4. Ergebnisse; 4.1 Pläne und Wege nach Beendigung der Schule; 4.2 Verlaufstypen von Bildungs- und Ausbildungswegen in den ersten fünf Übergangsjahren3; 4.3 Determinanten der Verlaufstypen; 4.4 Ergebnisse der qualitativen Interviews; 5. Fazit; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Biographische Risiken und schulpädagogische MaßnahmenAbstract; 1. Einleitung; 2. Gesellschaftliche Anforderungen, Kompetenz und Lernen; 3. Das Forschungsprojekt; 3.1 Empirische Befunde: Jugendleben in pädagogischen Maßnahmen; 3.2 Jugendphase und Gesellschaftlichkeit; Literatur; Werkschulen in Bremen - Ergebnisse des ESF-Pilotvorhabens""Entwicklung und Implementation eines Konzeptszur Förderung lernbenachteiligter Jugendlicher durchpraxisorientiertes Lernen""; Ahstract; 1. Einleitung; 2. Konzept der Werkschule; 2.1 Vorläufer der Werkschule und gesetzlicher Rahmen
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.2 Gestaltungsprinzipien des Werkschulkonzepts3. Ergebnisse der Befragung; 3.1 Befragungsergebnisse - Werkschulteam; 3.2 Befragungsergebnisse - Schülerinnen und Schüler; 4. Zusammenfassung und Empfehlungen; Literatur; ""Und Sie bewegt sich doch"" - Das HamburgerAusbildungsmodell und die Veränderungen im Übergangssystem; Abstract; 1. Der ""pädagogische Zwischenraum"" - Chancenlosigkeit durch Bildung; 2. Quantitative Veränderungen: Kehrtwende?; 3. Das ""Hamburger Ausbildungsmodell""; 3.1 Politische Entwicklungslinien der Reform der beruflichen Bildung in Hamburg
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2 Erste Konturierung des ""Hamburger Ausbildungsmodells""3.2.1 Neue Übergangsstrukturen; 4. Zwischenstand; 5. Fazit; Literatur; Zielkonßikte beruflicher Qualifizierung zwischen Bildungs-, Wirtschafts- und Sozialpolitik; Abstract; 1. Vorbemerkungen; 2. Die These vom Übergangssystem als Kollateralschaden der dualenBerufsaushildung; 3. Das strukturelle Dilemma eines weltweit anerkannten Qualifizierungskonzeptes; 4. Fazit; Literatur; Das Übergangsgeschehen - ein neues ""Dispositiv der Macht""?Bericht über eine Verblüffung; Abstract; 1. Einleitung; 2. Eine merkwürdige Gemengelage
    Description / Table of Contents: 3. Wahrnehmungen und Diskurse
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    HeBIS
  • 74
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Democratic Culture and Moral Character : A Study in Culture and Personality (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400767546
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 264 p, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.
    DDC: 301
    RVK:
    MD 6000
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Humanities ; Anthropology ; Consciousness ; Social Sciences ; Politische Psychologie ; Kritische Theorie
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6754-6
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    URL: http://dx.doi.org/10.1007/978-94-007-6754-6
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    KOBV
    BVB
    HBZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 75
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Demography of Health and Healthcare : Third Edition (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789048189038
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (IX, 300 p. 92 illus, digital)
    Edition: 3rd ed. 2013
    Series Statement: The Springer Series on Demographic Methods and Population Analysis 13
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Humanities, Social Science and Law
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Pol, Louis G. The demography of health and healthcare
    Keywords: Demographie ; Gesundheitswesen ; USA ; Social sciences ; Public health ; Population ; Demography ; Social Sciences
    DOI: 10.1007/978-90-481-8903-8
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 76
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Methods for Multilevel Analysis and Visualisation of Geographical Networks (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400766778
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (X, 223 p. 105 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Methodos Series, Methodological Prospects in the Social Sciences 11
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Series Statement: Springer eBook Collection
    Series Statement: Humanities, Social Sciences and Law
    Parallel Title: Druckausg.: Methods for Multilevel Analysis and Visualisation of Geographical Networks
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Computer vision ; Cartography ; Social sciences Methodology ; Human Geography ; Social Sciences ; Anthropogeografie ; Daten ; Netzwerk
    Abstract: This leading-edge study focuses on the latest techniques in analysing and representing the complex, multi-layered data now available to geographers studying urban zones and their populations. The volume tracks the successful results of the SPANGEO Project, which was set up in 2005 to standardize, and share, the syncretic, multinational mapping techniques already developed by geographers and computer scientists. SPANGEO sought new and responsive ways of visualising urban geographical and social data that reflected the fine-grained detail of the inputs. It allowed for visual representation of the large and complex networks and flows which are such an integral feature of the dynamism of urban geography. SPANGEO developed through the ‘visual analytics loop’ in which geographers collaborated with computer scientists by feeding data into the design of visualisations that in turn spawned the urge to incorporate more varied data into the visualisation. This volume covers all the relevant aspects, from conceptual principles to the tools of network analysis and the actual results flowing from their deployment. Detailed case studies set out in this volume include spatial multi-level analyses of flows in airports and sea ports, as well as the fascinating scientific networks in European cities. The volume shows how the primary concern of geography-the interaction of society with physical space-has been revivified by the complexities of new cartographical and statistical methodologies, which allow for highly detailed mapping and far more powerful computer analysis of spatial relationships
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-6677-8
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 77
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Kritik der Moralisierung : Theoretische Grundlagen - Diskurskritik - Klärungsvorschläge für die berufliche Praxis (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531194639
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 online resource (291 p.))
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Perspektiven kritischer Sozialer Arbeit
    Series Statement: EBL-Schweitzer
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Kritik der Moralisierung
    DDC: 306.3
    RVK:
    CC 7260
    RVK:
    DS 4100
    RVK:
    DS 4000
    Keywords: Social service -- Moral and ethical aspects ; Consumers - Attitudes ; Consumption (Economics) ; Social ethics ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Sozialarbeit ; Ethik ; Moral
    Abstract: Inhalt; Einleitung; Moral im öffentlich-politischen Diskurs; Etablierung von Ethik; Ethik und Moral in der Sozialen Arbeit; Zum Konzept des Aufsatzbandes; Zu den einzelnen Beiträgen; Literatur; Teil 1 Theoretische Grundlagen; Sozialphilosophie und Ethik; 1 Setzt die Philosophie des Sozialen eine Ethik voraus?; 2 Wie ist es zu der Überzeugung gekommen, daß die Sozialphilosophie normativ zu sein habe, eine Ethik also voraussetze?; 3 Grundlagen einer nicht-normativen Sozialphilosophie; 4 Die Sozialphilosophie des kommunikativen Textes
    Abstract: 5 Stellung der Ethik im Rahmen der Sozialphilosophie des kommunikativen Textes6 Politische Konsequenzen; 7 Fazit; Literatur; Ethik und Foucault - Die Frage nach „Technologien des Selbst"; 1 „Ethik" als historisches Untersuchungsfeld; 2 Weshalb Technologien ?; 3 Sorge, Mut, Freiheit; 4 Antike Moralität und Ethik heute; Literatur; „Warnung vor der Moral" - zur Funktionsbestimmung von Moral und Ethik in der Theorie Luhmanns; Was lässt sich durch die systemtheoretische Perspektive gewinnen?; Begriffliche und theoretische Voraussetzungen; Moral in funktional differenzierten Gesellschaften
    Abstract: Moral in den alltäglichen InteraktionenMoral innerhalb von Funktionssystemen; Moralisierung als sozio-politische Irritation; Funktion von Ethik; Folgerungen; Literatur; Moral als psychische Disposition? Ein sozialpsychologischer Blick; 1 Einstellungs-Syndrome als Wertesysteme; 2 „Meine" Gruppe und ich - Chancen und Risiken; 3 „Gehorsam" - ein Wert?; 4 „Verführung" - leicht gemacht?; 5 Vor jeder Verführung: das Entstehen von Moral; 6 Beiträge der sozial-kognitiven Lernpsychologie; 7 „Gefühlte" Moral - die bessere Erklärung?; 7.1 Moralische Helden; 7.2 Das Moralgefühl der Kinder
    Abstract: 7.3 Der Moral-Instinkt7.4 Emotionale Grundbedürfnisse - gut, sie zu haben, schlecht, sie zu verletzen; 8 Zusammenfassung und Schlussfolgerungen; Literatur; Letzte Werte, höherer Sinn - Zur paradoxen Artikulation von Moral in modernen Gesellschaften; 1 Küche und Moral; 2 Symbolische Sinnwelten - die wissenssoziologische Konzeption von Moral; 3 Moderne - Moralisierungsdistanz und Remoralisierung; 3.1 Veralltäglichung von Moral; 3.2 Individualität als letzter letzter Wert; 3.3 Soziale Welten und die Konkurrenz kollektiver Identitäten; 4 Schlussbemerkungen; Literatur
    Abstract: Teil 2 Reflexionen des Verhältnisses von Ethik und Sozialer ArbeitChristliche Ethik in einer säkularen Gesellschaft - Kontroversen um Konzepte der Wohlfahrt und Sozialen Arbeit; 1 Christlichkeit in einer säkularen Gesellschaft; 1.1 Gesellschaftlicher Einfluss der Kirchen; 1.2 Erwartungen und Interessen des Staates und der Bevölkerung; 2 Christlichkeit und moderner Sozial-/Wohlfahrtsstaat; 2.1 Christliche Wohlfahrtsmodelle; 2.2 Christliche Ethik und Sozialarbeit heute; Literatur; ‚Moralisieren' und die Grenzen der Moral; 1 Eine kurze Geschichte des ‚moralisieren'
    Abstract: 2 Das Herstellen von Unbedingtheit
    Abstract: Die Zunahme von Themen, die in öffentlichen Debatten als ‚ethisch' markiert werden und eine generelle Verankerung von Ethik in sozialen Berufen verweisen auf einen Reflexionsbedarf, der die Bedeutung und den Umfang des Begriffs zum Gegenstand einer kritischen Auseinandersetzung macht. In den Beiträgen dieses Bandes werden Bestimmungen von Ethik und Moral vorgenommen, die auch und vor allem kritische Perspektiven auf Praktiken einer Moralisierung der Gesellschaft insgesamt und auch der Ausbildungs- und Berufspraxis Sozialer Arbeit eröffnen. Neben Ausführungen zu theoretischen Grundlagen und ein
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 78
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Medienkultur : Die Kultur mediatisierter Welten (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531199337
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (1 online resource (179 p.))
    Edition: 2nd ed (Online-Ausg.)
    Series Statement: Medien - Kultur - Kommunikation
    Series Statement: EBL-Schweitzer
    Parallel Title: Druckausg. Hepp, Andreas, 1970 - Medienkultur
    DDC: 302.2
    RVK:
    AP 14350
    Keywords: Mass media -- Social aspects ; Mass media ; Electronic books ; Medienkultur
    Abstract: Warum Mediatisierung? Ein Vorwort zur 2. Auflage; Vorwort zur 1. Auflage; Inhaltsverzeichnis; 1 Einleitung; 2 Was Medienkultur (nicht) ist; 2.1Omnipräsent, aber keine Massenkultur; 2.2Mediumsgeprägt, aber keine Leitmedienkultur; 2.3Wirklichkeitskonstitutiv, aber kein Integrationsprogramm; 2.4Technisiert, aber keine Cyberkultur; 3 Mediatisierung von Kultur; 3.1Mediatisierung und Vermittlung; 3.2Medienlogik(en); 3.3Mediatisierung als Metaprozess und Panorama; 3.4Kommunikation und die Prägkräfte der Medien; 4 Medienkultur als die Kultur mediatisierter Welten; 4.1Medienkultur als Konzept
    Abstract: 4.2Mediatisierte Welten4.3Netzwerke der Kommunikation und des Sozialen; 4.4Kommunikative Figurationen; 5 Vergemeinschaftungen heutiger Medienkulturen; 5.1Lokalität und Translokalität; 5.2Territorialisierung und Deterritorialisierung; 5.3Deterritoriale Vergemeinschaftungen; 5.4Mediatisierte subjektive Vergemeinschaftungshorizonte; 6 Medienkultur erforschen; 6.1Theorien entwickeln; 6.2De-zentrieren; 6.3Muster bestimmen; 6.4Transkulturell vergleichen; 7 Ausblick; Literatur; Stichwortregister; Personenregister
    Abstract: Was heißt es für unsere Kultur, wenn wir durch Mobiltelefone überall erreichbar sind? Was bedeutet es kulturell, wenn alles Wichtige im Fernsehen verhandelt wird? Wie ändern sich unsere Vergemeinschaftungen, wenn wir zunehmend über das Social Web vernetzt sind? Welche Folgen hat all das für den Wandel unserer Kultur, Alltagswelt und Gesellschaft? Fragen wie diese kumulieren in dem Begriff der „Mediatisierung"", der zu einem Schlüsselkonzept der internationalen Diskussion um Medien geworden ist. Das Buch führt in diese Diskussion anhand vieler Beispiele ein. Dabei wird deutlich, dass Medienkult
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 79
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    International Handbook on the Demography of Sexuality (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400755116
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (488 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: International Handbooks of Population v.5
    Parallel Title: Print version International Handbook on the Demography of Sexuality
    DDC: 304.61
    Keywords: Sexual minorities -- Statistics ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: The International Handbook on the Demography of Sexuality is the first book to specifically address the study of sexuality from a demographic perspective. Demographic research has largely paid little attention to sexuality as a whole, or sexual orientation in particular, other than in studies examining the "consequences" of sex - sexually transmitted infections or fertility. Instead, the content of this handbook explores population sexuality in order to describe the prevalence of sexual behaviors, desires, and identities, as well as their connections with other demographic outcomes. The focus
    Description / Table of Contents: Contents; Part I: Introduction to the Demography of Sexuality; 1: Introduction: The Demography of Sexuality; Introduction; A Brief History of Sex Research; Alfred Kinsey; Sex Research After Kinsey; The Demography of Sexuality; References; 2: Sexual Behavior and Practices: Data and Measurement; Introduction; Surveying Sexual Behavior: Alfred Kinsey; A Short History of Sexual Behavior in Surveys Post-Kinsey; Methodological and Measurement Issues in the Study of Sexual Behavior; Sampling Error: Population Definition and Inclusion, Participation, and Selection; Measurement Error
    Description / Table of Contents: Conclusion: The Future of Research on Sexual BehaviorReferences; 3: Best Practices: Collecting and Analyzing Data on Sexual Minorities; Introduction; Why Ask Questions Designed to Identify Sexual Minorities; Measuring Sexual Orientation on Surveys: What to Ask; Recommended Survey Items and Their Rationale 3; Self-Identification; Sexual Behavior; Sexual Attraction; Transgender Status and Gender Noncomformity; Recommended Survey Items to Accompany Questions About Sexual Orientation; Other Recommendations for Measuring Sexual Orientation
    Description / Table of Contents: Measuring Sexual Orientation on Surveys: How and Where to AskItem Placement; Survey Mode; Sampling Issues; Developmental and Cultural Considerations in Collecting Data on Sexual Orientation; Adolescents; What to Ask; Use of Terms; Older Adults; Race/Ethnicity and Culture; Measurement; What to Ask; Factors Influencing Identity Formation; Best Practices For Analyses of Sexual Orientation Data; Consideration of Differences among Non-Heterosexual Responses; Survey Methodology and Measurement Reliability and Validity; Demographic Subgroup Analyses; Socio-political and Policy Issues; Temporal Issues
    Description / Table of Contents: Measurement ErrorOther Issues and Future Directions; References; Part II: Sexual Practices: The Global Picture; 4: Sexual Behavior, Sexual Attraction, and Sexual Identity in the United States: Data from the 2006-2010 National Survey of Family Growth; Introduction; Selected Previous Studies; Methods; Data Source; Use of ACASI; Demographic Variables Used in This Chapter; Measurement of Sexual Behavior in NSFG ACASI; Types of Sexual Behavior for Female Respondents; Types of Sexual Behavior for Male Respondents; Numbers of Opposite-Sex Sexual Partners
    Description / Table of Contents: Measurement of Sexual Attraction and Sexual Identity in NSFG ACASIStrengths and Limitations of the Data; Statistical Analysis; Results; Types of Sexual Behavior with Opposite-Sex and Same-Sex Partners; Numbers of Opposite-Sex Sexual Partners in Lifetime; Same-Sex Sexual Activity; Sexual Identity and Sexual Attraction; Association of Sexual Behavior, Sexual Attraction, and Sexual Identity; Conclusion; References; 5: Sexual Practices of Latin America and the Caribbean; Introduction; Data and Methodology; Trends in Early Sexual and Reproductive Events; Context of Sexual Activity During Adulthood
    Description / Table of Contents: Sexual Violence
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 80
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Neighbourhood effects or neighbourhood based problems? : a policy context (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400766952
    Language: English
    Pages: xii, 296 p. , ill.
    DDC: 304.2
    RVK:
    MS 1810
    Keywords: Neighborhoods ; Urban policy ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Aufsatzsammlung
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    URL: lizenzpflichtig
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    KOBV
    BVB
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 81
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Quality of Life in Asia : A Comparison of Quality of Life in Asia (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789048190720 , 1283633604 , 9781283633604
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 247 p, digital)
    Series Statement: Quality of Life in Asia 1
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Inoguchi, Takashi, 1944 - The quality of life in Asia
    DDC: 306.095090511
    RVK:
    LB 40330
    Keywords: Lebensqualität ; Zufriedenheit ; Lebensstil ; Vergleich ; Asien ; Social sciences ; Quality of Life ; Regional economics ; Social policy ; Quality of Life Research ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Quality of Life ; Regional economics ; Social policy ; Quality of Life Research ; Quality of life ; United States ; History ; 21st century ; Asien ; Lebensqualität ; Asien ; Lebensqualität
    Abstract: This book studies and compares quality of life in 29 countries/societies in Asia: Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, Brunei, Cambodia, China, Hong Kong, India, Indonesia, Japan, Kazakhstan, Kyrgyzstan, Korea(South), Laos, Malaysia, Maldives, Mongolia, Myanmar, Nepal, Pakistan, the Philippines, Singapore, Sri Lanka, Taiwan, Tajikistan, Thailand, Turkmenistan, Uzbekistan, and Vietnam. We utilize the AsiaBarometer Surveys conducted annually from 2003 through 2008. We focus on the notion of subjective quality of life and conceptualize it as two levels, global and domain. After we explain about the AsiaBarometer Survey Project, we explore current country profile, demographics, lifestyles, value priorities, specific life domain assessment and overall quality of life. We then estimate the independent effects of demographics, lifestyles, value priorities, life domain assessment on the overall quality of life within each society. As well as comparing the results between nations, we look for key generalized characteristics of life quality for the entire and sub-regions of Asia.
    Description / Table of Contents: The Quality of Life in Asia; Synoptic Outline; Acknowledgements; Contents; Chapter 1: Introduction; 1.1 Asia: Enormous Diversity; 1.2 Asia: Why Is Quality of Life in Asia Important to Examine?; 1.3 The Notion of Quality of Life and Research Design; 1.4 Organization; References; Chapter 2: The AsiaBarometer Survey Project; 2.1 Its Aim and Trust; 2.1.1 Introduction; 2.1.2 Rationale and Promises of the AsiaBarometer; 2.1.2.1 Knowledge Begets Prosperity; 2.1.2.2 Knowledge Engenders Stability; 2.1.2.3 Contribution to Scholarship; 2.1.3 Principles of Questionnaire Formulation
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1.3.1 Minimum Unobtrusiveness2.1.3.2 Minimum Oddness; 2.1.3.3 Most Similar and Most Dissimilar Systems Comparisons; 2.1.4 Four Distinctive Clusters of Questions; 2.1.4.1 Daily Lives of Ordinary People; 2.1.4.2 Perceptions and Assessments of Their Lives; 2.1.4.3 From Relationships of Their Lives to Larger Social Entities; 2.1.4.4 Norms, Beliefs, Value Preferences, and Actions; 2.1.5 Harvesting the AsiaBarometer Survey; 2.1.6 Gauging Developmental, Democratic, and Regionalizing Potentials; 2.2 Methodology; 2.2.1 Countries/Societies; 2.2.2 Sampling Methods of the AsiaBarometer Survey
    Description / Table of Contents: ReferencesChapter 3: Overall Quality of Life in Asia; 3.1 Levels of Happiness; 3.2 Levels of Enjoyment; 3.3 Levels of Achievement; Reference; Chapter 4: Satisfaction Levels with Specific Life Domains; 4.1 Materialist Life Sphere; 4.1.1 Housing; 4.1.2 Standard of Living; 4.1.3 Household Income; 4.1.4 Health; 4.1.5 Education; 4.1.6 Job; 4.2 Post-materialist Life Sphere; 4.2.1 Friendships; 4.2.2 Marriage; 4.2.3 Neighbors; 4.2.4 Family Life; 4.2.5 Leisure; 4.2.6 Spiritual Life; 4.3 Public Sphere of Life; 4.3.1 Public Safety; 4.3.2 The Condition of the Environment; 4.3.3 Social Welfare System
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.3.4 The Democratic System4.4 Patterns of Life Domain Satisfactions by Society; 4.5 Distinguishing Life Sphere of Domain Satisfactions in Each Country and Society; 4.5.1 East Asia; 4.5.1.1 China; 4.5.1.2 Hong Kong; 4.5.1.3 Japan; 4.5.1.4 South Korea; 4.5.1.5 Taiwan; 4.5.2 Southeast Asia; 4.5.2.1 Brunei; 4.5.2.2 Cambodia; 4.5.2.3 Indonesia; 4.5.2.4 Laos; 4.5.2.5 Malaysia; 4.5.2.6 Myanmar; 4.5.2.7 The Philippines; 4.5.2.8 Singapore; 4.5.2.9 Thailand; 4.5.2.10 Vietnam; 4.5.3 South Asia; 4.5.3.1 Bangladesh; 4.5.3.2 Bhutan; 4.5.3.3 India; 4.5.3.4 The Maldives; 4.5.3.5 Nepal; 4.5.3.6 Pakistan
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.5.3.7 Sri Lanka4.5.4 Central Asia; 4.5.4.1 Afghanistan; 4.5.4.2 Kazakhstan; 4.5.4.3 Kyrgyzstan; 4.5.4.4 Mongolia; 4.5.4.5 Tajikistan; 4.5.4.6 Uzbekistan; 4.5.5 Types of Countries (Societies) Based on Factor Analyses; References; Chapter 5: Lifestyles; 5.1 Modern Life; 5.2 Digital Life; 5.3 Religious Life; 5.4 Global Life; 5.5 Political Life; 5.6 Family Life; 5.7 Self-Assessments of Relative Standard of Living; References; Chapter 6: Value Priorities; Chapter 7: Determinants of Overall Quality of Life; 7.1 Dependent Variables; 7.1.1 Happiness; 7.1.2 Enjoyment; 7.1.3 Achievement
    Description / Table of Contents: 7.2 Independent Variables
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-90-481-9072-0
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Abstract
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    KOBV
    BVB
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 82
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Early childhood and neuroscience-- links to development and learning (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 1299876994 , 9781299876996 , 9789400766716
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource
    Series Statement: Educating the young child v.7
    Series Statement: Educating the Young Child Ser. v.7
    Parallel Title: Print version Early Childhood and Neuroscience - Links to Development and Learning
    DDC: 372.21
    Keywords: Child development ; Cognitive neuroscience ; Early childhood education ; Child development.. ; Neurosciences ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Information from neuroscience is growing and being properly used, and misused wich makes it imperative that educators receive accurate and practical information. This book provides the accurate and practical information educators (pre-service and in-service) and caregivers serving children birth through age 8 need to know. This volume takes a practical and cautionary stance. It reminds educators to consider the ethical implications of neuroscience when it is applied to education, reviews current findings from neuroscience and reveals the dangers of oversimplification and inappropriate extensio
    Description / Table of Contents: Preface ; Educational Neuroscience and the Double Entendre; References; Acknowledgments; Contents; Chapter 1: Introduction; How Does a Volume Such as This Come Together?; Importance of This Book for Educating Today's Children; Overview of Book; Conclusion; Chapter 2: The Practical and Ethical Concerns of Using Neuroscience to Teach Young Children and Help Them Self-Regulate; Introduction; Ethical and Moral Issues Arising from Neuroscience; Education as an Ethical/Moral Enterprise; Neuroscience, Educators, and Ethical Decisions; A Utilitarian Approach to Moral Decisions
    Description / Table of Contents: A Rights Approach to Moral Decisions A Fairness or Justice Approach to Moral Decisions; A Common-Good Approach to Moral Decisions; A Virtue Approach to Moral Decisions; References; Chapter 3: Neuroscience: The Genesis of Our Individual Brain Strengths; Introduction; Brain-Based Aspects of Multiple Intelligences; The Environment Part I: The MI Early Childhood Classroom (ECC); The Observations; Heredity Influences: Neurologically Speaking, Each Brain Is Unique; Studying the Outside of the Brain; Looking from the Inside-Out: Brain Development in Utero
    Description / Table of Contents: How Do Our Individual Brain-Based Preferences Develop? Neural Networks Are Knowledge; What About Our Three ECE Students' Brain-Based Strengths?; The Wisdom of Activating Prior Knowledge; Individual Brain Talents; Practical Applications: Using the Environment to Develop Students' Neurological Gifts and Remediate Their Underdeveloped MI Areas; Conclusion; References; Chapter 4: Reading and the Young Brain; The Convergence of Neurosciences, Psychology, and Education; Reading Development in Young Children; Experiences Shape Brain Development; While Language Is Innate, Reading Is Not
    Description / Table of Contents: Learning Two Languages Doesn't Suppress Either Repetition Leads to Automaticity; We Are Hardwired to Imitate; Practical Applications; References; Chapter 5: Brain Development, Early Childhood, and Brain-Based Education: A Critical Analysis; Introduction; Neural Development; Prenatal Development; Postnatal Development; Importance of Myelin; Life Span Changes in the Brain; Repairing an Injured Brain; Practical Applications; The Brain, Educational Policy, and Critical Periods; "Right" Versus "Left" Brain; Brain Lateralization and Gender Differences; Brain-Compatible Teaching
    Description / Table of Contents: Brain-Compatible Teaching, Learning Styles, and Multiple Intelligences Exercising the Brain; Summary; References; Chapter 6: Addressing the Affective Domain: What Neuroscience Says About Social/Emotional Development in Early Childhood; Introduction; The Affective Domain and Its Role in Learning; Brain Architecture; Critical Periods of Brain Development; Nature and Nurture, Not Nature or Nurture; Neuroplasticity of the Brain; The Environment and Its Impact on Emotional Development; Relationships with Caregivers; The Inseparability of Thoughts and Feelings; Expressing Emotions
    Description / Table of Contents: Nurturing Emotional Development
    Note: Includes bibliographical references and index
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 83
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Religion and Place : Landscape, Politics and Piety (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400746855
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XIII, 222 p. 7 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Religion and place
    DDC: 304.2
    RVK:
    BE 2240
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Religion (General) ; Human Geography ; Social Sciences ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Religion ; Ort ; Politik
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4685-5
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Cover
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 84
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Legal Argumentation Theory: Cross-Disciplinary Perpectives (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400746701
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 233 p. 7 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Law and Philosophy Library 102
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druck-Ausgabe Legal argumentation theory
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Legal argumentation theory
    RVK:
    PI 4130
    Keywords: Philosophy of law ; Computers Law and legislation ; Semantics ; Humanities ; Law ; Law ; Philosophy of law ; Computers Law and legislation ; Semantics ; Humanities ; Forensic orations ; Law ; Methodology ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Konferenzschrift ; Rechtsphilosophie ; Interdisziplinäre Forschung
    Abstract: This book offers its readers an overview of recent developments in the theory of legal argumentation written by representatives from various disciplines, including argumentation theory, philosophy of law, logic and artificial intelligence. It presents an overview of contributions representative of different academic and legal cultures, and different continents and countries. The book contains contributions on strategic maneuvering, argumentum ad absurdum, argumentum ad hominem, consequentialist argumentation, weighing and balancing, the relation between legal argumentation and truth, the distinction between the context of discovery and context of justification, and the role of constitutive and regulative rules in legal argumentation. It is based on a selection of papers that were presented in the special workshop on Legal Argumentation organized at the 25th IVR World Congress for Philosophy of Law and Social Philosophy held 15-20 August 2011 in Frankfurt, Germany.
    Description / Table of Contents: Legal Argumentation Theory: Cross-Disciplinary Perspectives; Introduction; Contents; Chapter 1: Reasoning by Consequences: Applying Different Argumentation Structures to the Analysis of Consequentialist Reasoning in Judicial Decisions; 1.1 Introduction; 1.2 Theories on Consequentialist Reasoning; 1.2.1 MacCormick's Theory; 1.2.2 Wróblewski's Theory; 1.2.3 Feteris' Pragma-Dialectical Proposal; 1.3 Judges on Consequences; 1.4 Conclusions; References; Chapter 2: On the Argumentum ad Absurdum in Statutory Interpretation: Its Uses and Normative Significance; 2.1 Introduction
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.2 The Strictly Logical Sense of the Argumentum ad Absurdum2.3 The Argumentum ad Absurdum as a Special Case of Pragmatic Argument; 2.3.1 The Problem of the Indeterminacy of Pragmatic Arguments and the Distinctive Feature of the ad Absurdum Argument; 2.3.2 The Difference Between the Argumentum ad Absurdum and the Generic Consequentialist Arguments; 2.3.3 The Context of the ad Absurdum Argument; 2.3.4 The Foundation of the Argumentum ad Absurdum; 2.3.4.1 The Nature of the Assumption of the Rational Legislator
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.4.2 A Second Thought on the Nature of the ad Absurdum Argument: Absurdity as Unreasonableness2.3.4.3 On the Foundations of the ad Absurdum Argument and the Assumption of the Rational Legislator; 2.3.5 The Practical Requirements of the Pragmatic Version of the ad Absurdum Argument; 2.4 Final Considerations; References; Chapter 3: Why Precedent in Law (and Elsewhere) Is Not Totally (or Even Substantially) About Analogy; 3.1 Analogy as a Friend; 3.2 Precedent as a Foe; 3.3 On the Differences Between Analogy and Precedent; 3.4 Does Precedential Constraint Make Sense?
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.5 Towards a Research Program on PrecedentReferences; Chapter 4: Fallacies in Ad Hominem Arguments; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Definition of Argument Ad Hominem; 4.3 Ad Hominem Fallacies; 4.4 Talking About Errors as Fallacies; 4.5 Conclusions; References; Chapter 5: The Rule of Law and the Ideal of a Critical Discussion; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 The Pragma-Dialectical Approach to Legal Argumentation; 5.2.1 Methodological Starting-Points; 5.2.2 Reasonableness and the Ideal Model of a Critical Discussion; 5.3 The Ideal of the Rule of Law; 5.4 Reconstructing Judicial Standpoints in Legal Decisions
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.4.1 Houtlosser Defines the Speech Act `Advancing a Standpoint' with the following conditions5.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 6: Strategic Maneuvering with the Argumentative Role of Legal Principles in the Case of the "Unworthy Spouse"; 6.1 Introduction; 6.2 The Case of the `Unworthy Spouse'; 6.3 Dialectical Analysis of the Argumentation of the Supreme Court; 6.4 Dialectical Analysis of the Contributions to the Discussion of the Court of Appeal and the Supreme Court; 6.4.1 Dialectical Analysis of the Contributions of the Court of Appeal
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.4.2 Dialectical Analysis of the Contributions of the Supreme Court
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4670-1
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    URL: Inhaltsverzeichnis
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 85
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Multifaith Movement: Global Risks and Cosmopolitan Solutions (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400752108
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XVI, 181 p, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T.
    RVK:
    MS 6550
    Keywords: Humanities ; Religion (General) ; Humanities / Arts ; Religiöser Pluralismus ; Interreligiosität ; Soziale Bewegung ; Friedenskonsolidierung
    Abstract: This book documents the ultramodern rise of the multifaith movement, as mulitfaith initiatives have been increasingly deployed as cosmopolitan solutions to counter global risks such as terrorism and climate change at the turn of the 21st century. These projects aim to enhance common security, particularly in Western societies following the events of September 11, 2001 and the July 2005 London bombings, where multifaith engagement has been promoted as a strategy to counter violent extremism. The author draws on interviews with 56 leading figures in the field of multifaith relations, including Paul Knitter, Eboo Patel, Marcus Braybrooke, Katherine Marshall, John Voll and Krista Tippett.Identifying the principle aims of the multifaith movement, the analysis explores the benefits-and challenges-of multifaith engagement, as well as the effectiveness of multifaith initiatives in countering the process of radicalization. Building on notions of cosmopolitanism, the work proposes a new theoretical framework termed ‘Netpeace’, which recognizes the interconnectedness of global problems and their solutions. In doing so, it acknowledges the capacity of multi-actor peacebuilding networks, including religious and state actors, to address the pressing dilemmas of our times. The primary intention of the book is to assist in the formation of new models of activism and governance, founded on a ‘politics of understanding’ modeled by the multifaith movement.
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-5210-8
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 86
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Handbook of Neurosociology (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400744738
    ISSN: 1389-6903
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (XII, 406 p. 32 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Handbooks of Sociology and Social Research
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Druck-Ausg. Franks, David D., 1931 - Handbook of neurosociology
    RVK:
    MS 6000
    RVK:
    CZ 1300
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Neurology ; Psychology, clinical ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Neurology ; Psychology, clinical ; Neurosciences ; Social aspects ; Neurowissenschaften ; Soziologie ; Neurobiologie ; Neurologie ; Soziologie
    Abstract: Until recently, a handbook on neurosociology would have been viewed with skepticism by sociologists, who have long been protective of their disciplinary domain against perceived encroachment by biology. But a number of developments in the last decade or so have made sociologists more receptive to biological factors in sociology and social psychology. Much of this has been encouraged by the coeditors of this volume, David Franks and Jonathan Turner. This new interest has been increased by the explosion of research in neuroscience on brain functioning and brain-environment interaction (via new MRI technologies), with implications for social and psychological functioning. This handbook emphasizes the integration of perspectives within sociology as well as between fields in social neuroscience. For example, Franks represents a social constructionist position following from G.H. Meads voluntaristic theory of the act while Turner is more social structural and positivistic. Furthermore, this handbook not only contains contributions from sociologists, but leading figures from the psychological perspective of social neuroscience.
    Description / Table of Contents: Handbook of Neurosociology; Preface; References; Contents; Contributors; Chapter 1: Introduction: Summaries and Comments; David Franks: A Short History; Brain Activity Measures and Limitations; Jonathan H. Turner: Coming on Board as an Editor; What Does Neurosociology Have to Offer?; References; Part I: Large Issues; Chapter 2: Neural Social Science; Reason Is Neural; Back to the Future; How Brain Circuits Become Meaningful; Reason and Social Science; Reason Itself: Enlightenment Fallacies; The Enlightenment Fallacies; The First Fallacy: Reason Is Conscious
    Description / Table of Contents: The Second Fallacy: One Can Reason Directly About the WorldThe Third Fallacy: Thought Is Disembodied; The Fourth Fallacy: Words Are Defined Directly in Terms of Features of the External World; The Fifth Fallacy: Reason Is Unemotional; The Sixth Fallacy: Reason Is Literal and Logical; The Seventh Fallacy: Categories Are Defined by Necessary and Sufficient Conditions; The Eighth Fallacy: Reason Exists Primarily to Serve Self-interest; The Ninth Fallacy: Conceptual Systems Are Monolithic; The Tenth Fallacy: Words Have Fixed Meanings, and Concepts Have Fixed Logics
    Description / Table of Contents: The Eleventh Fallacy: The Truth Will Set You Free If Enough People Know the Truth About Social Issues, They Will Change Their Attitudes, to Society's Bene fi t; Some Brain Basics; Color; Perception and Action; That's Why There Are Basic-Level Concepts; That's Why Verb Roots Are the Same for First- and Third-Person Experiences; Imagining and Doing Use the Same Brain Circuitry; Neural Computation and Simulation; The Centrality of Metaphor in Social Life; Neural Metaphor; The Narayanan-Johnson-Grady Neural Theory of Metaphor; How Are Neural Circuits Learned?
    Description / Table of Contents: The Feldman Functional Circuitry HypothesisPrimary Metaphors; Narayanan on Spike-Time-Dependent Plasticity; Neuromodulators and "Rewards"; Integrating Multiple Neural Systems; Embodiment Evidence in Social Psychology; Real Social and Political Life; The Conservative Advantage; What Can Progressives and Democrats Do?; Systems Thinking; The Point; CODA; Solving a Social Science Puzzle; References; Chapter 3: Why We Need Neurosociology as Well as Social Neuroscience: Or-Why Role-Taking and Theory of Mind Are Different Concepts; History of the Terms Neurosociology and Social Neuroscience
    Description / Table of Contents: Distinguishing Between the Two Fields Using Role-Taking and ToMSome Ways Role-Taking and Power Can be Explored Experimentally; What Social Neuroscience Can Offer Sociological Research on Role-Taking and Power; Empirically Testing the Role-Taking and Power Hypothesis; Conclusions; References; Chapter 4: Social Cognition and the Problem of Other Minds; Where in the World Are Minds?; The Psychology of Individual Minds; Social Psychology and Social Cognition; What Do Minds Learn to Mind?; Brains and Minds Grow Together; Socialized Brains Remain Social Minds; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 5: Genetic, Hormonal, and Neural Underpinnings of Human Aggressive Behavior
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4473-8
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 87
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    The Natural philosophy of Emanuel Swedenborg : A Study in the Conceptual Metaphors of the Mechanistic World-View (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400745605
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VII, 483 p. 62 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: Studies in the History of Philosophy of Mind 11
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Dunér, David, 1970 - The natural philosophy of Emanuel Swedenborg
    RVK:
    CF 8617
    Keywords: Philosophy (General) ; Science History ; Philosophy of mind ; Humanities ; Philosophy ; Philosophy (General) ; Science History ; Philosophy of mind ; Humanities ; Swedenborg, Emanuel 1688-1772 ; Naturphilosophie ; Swedenborg, Emanuel 1688-1772 ; Naturphilosophie
    Abstract: Although Emanuel Swedenborg (16881772) is commonly known for his spiritual philosophy, his early career was focused unnatural science. During this period, Swedenborg thought of the world was like a gigantic machine, following the laws of mechanics and geometry. This volume analyzes this mechanistic worldview from the cognitive perspective, by means of a study of the metaphors in Swedenborgs texts. The author argues that these conceptual metaphors are vital skills of the creative mind and scientific thinking, used to create visual analogies and abstract ideas. This means that Swedenborgs mechanistic and geometrical worldview, allowed him to perceive the world as mechanical and geometrical. Swedenborg thought with books and pens. The reading gave him associations and clues, forced him to interpret, and gave him material for his intellectual development.
    Description / Table of Contents: The Natural Philosophy of Emanuel Swedenborg; Contents; List of Figures; Introduction; Prologue on a Grain of Sand; Biographical Guide; Literature About a Phenomenon; A Theory of Swedenborg's Brain; Space and Thought; Metaphorical Thought; Seeing with the Inner Eye; Thinking with Books; Overview-The World Machine Seen from Above; The Space; A Blue Camera Obscura; The Society of the Curious; Armed Eyes; Attempts to Find East and West Longitude; We Are Educated by Studying, Experiencing, and Thinking; Unrest Disturbs My Work; From Barbarism to Culture; The Immutable World; The Sign
    Description / Table of Contents: Everything Is Silent, No One Knows Yet the DestinationLearned Games with the Number Sixty-Four; The Geometrical Number Eight; The Useful Number Eight; The Lord Is Wrathful; A Peripeteia on the Decimal; A Million Million; Rhetorical Arithmetic; Trees, Boxes, and Universal Mathematics; To Think Is to Count; The Wave; The Water Waves in Leiden; The Surging of the Sea; Sound in the Mountains of Lapland; In the Baroque Echo Temple; Thunder and Organ Peals; Fire and Colours; One Membrane Trembles from the Other's Trembling; The Beautiful Geometry of Tremulation; To Live Is to Tremble
    Description / Table of Contents: The Circles of the BodyHearing the Music from Within; Vision Extends into the Invisible; The Sphere; Hell Upon Earth; Flying in the Air; The Geometry of War; Nature-A Composite Analogy; The World Machine and the Little Machine; Peas and Cannonballs; A Sea of Bubbles; The Power of the Water Bubble; The Vapours Rising Over the Mountain; The Geometry of Heat; A Mineral Cabinet Without Stones; The Fruits of the Volcano; In the Bride-Chamber of the Mineral Kingdom; Vanitas Bubbles of Soap and Water; The Point; The Spider in the Polygonal Web; The Point That Delineates the World
    Description / Table of Contents: A Grain of Dust at the EquatorNature's Labyrinth; The Janus Face of the Mathematical Point; The Spiral; Helical Lines; The Circle of Time; The Force of the Moon; Whirls and Voids; On the Eternal Spring in the Age of Winter Cold; From Centre to Circumference and Back; Impossible Figures; The Microcosmic Spiral Motion; Magnetic Effluvia; The Magnetic Sphere and the Sidereal Heaven; The Macrocosmic Vortex; The Declination of the Magnetic Needle; The Membrane Between Body and Soul; The Infinite; A World That Is Not Even a Point; The Limits of the Unknowable
    Description / Table of Contents: The Infinite Is the Ultimate Cause of the FiniteThe Fantastic Order of the Brain Machine; The Limits of the Universe; The Nexus Between Infinite and Finite; The Last Effect of Creation; The Degree of Perfection; Escape to the Oracle of Reason; The Soul Machine; The Philosopher, the Happiest or the Unhappiest of Mortals; Conclusion; The Convolutions of the Brain; From Angular to Perpetuo-Spiritual Form; A Blind Man Who Can See, and the Form of Ideas; Swedenborg's Euphoria; Spiral Dances in Paradise; The Primary Metaphors of Correspondences; Memorabilia from Earthly Life
    Description / Table of Contents: The Geometry of the Spiritual World
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4560-5
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 88
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Transactional Perspectives on Occupation (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9789400744295 , 1283532646 , 9781283532648
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (VII, 266 p. 1 illus, digital)
    Series Statement: SpringerLink
    Series Statement: Bücher
    Parallel Title: Buchausg. u.d.T. Transactional perspectives on occupation
    RVK:
    YU 3300
    RVK:
    MS 6470
    Keywords: Social sciences ; Occupational Therapy ; Social Sciences ; Social sciences ; Occupational Therapy ; Transactional Analysis ; Occupational Therapy methods ; Occupations ; Philosophy ; Beschäftigungstherapie
    Abstract: An occupation is, most simply put, any activity we participate in that engages (occupies) our attention, interests, and/or expectations, at any point throughout the life course. This book offers an emerging and innovative perspective on occupation, based in the work of American philosopher John Dewey and other pragmatists, that challenges accepted ideas. Each chapter presents a lively and multifaceted dialogue on transactional perspectives on occupation. Scholars from Europe, North America, and Australasia have written a diverse set of arguments and case studies about occupation, covering theoretical, methodological and applied issues relevant to the topic. In addition, contributors make connections with significant authors from various disciplines that make clearer the roles of occupation and occupational science across many cultures and contexts. The transactional perspectives articulated in this book both implicitly and explicitly suggest that occupations are forms of activity that create and re-create a multitude of our relationships with the world. Often taken for granted by some academic disciplines, occupation is a core element of human life. This book is a provocative and critical analysis of the focal concept for occupational therapy and science.
    Description / Table of Contents: Transactional Perspectives on Occupation; Contents; Chapter 1: Transactional Perspectives on Occupation: An Introduction and Rationale; 1.1 Introduction and Invitation; 1.2 Development of Transactional Perspectives on Occupation; 1.3 A Pluralistic Approach; 1.4 Structure and Content of the Book; 1.5 Our Hopes; References; Part I: Theoretical Extensions; Chapter 2: Dewey's Concepts of Embodiment, Growth, and Occupation: Extended Bases for a Transactional Perspective; 2.1 Introduction; 2.2 Embodiment; 2.2.1 Live Creatures; 2.2.2 Embodying the Social; 2.3 Growth; 2.4 Occupation
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4.1 Dewey on Occupation2.4.2 Occupation, Embodiment, and Growth; 2.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 3: Being Occupied in the Everyday; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 The Habitual; 3.3 The Relational; 3.3.1 Continuity of Time: Past-Present-Future; 3.3.2 Continuity of Relating: Being-with-Others; 3.4 The Precarious; 3.5 Occupational Practice as Listening; 3.6 Conclusion; References; Chapter 4: Resituating the Meaning of Occupation: A Transactional Perspective; 4.1 Introduction; 4.2 Meaning Explored; 4.2.1 Social Science Perspectives on Meaning; 4.2.2 Occupational Perspectives on Meaning
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2.3 Philosophical Perspectives on Meaning: Heidegger and Dewey4.3 Perspectives on Meaning Uncovered by Research; 4.4 Implications for Occupational Therapy and Science; 4.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 5: Conceptual Insights for Expanding Thinking Regarding the Situated Nature of Occupation; 5.1 Introduction; 5.2 Governmentality Studies: Shaping Occupational Possibilities; 5.2.1 Discourses; 5.2.2 Differential Shaping of Occupational Possibilities; 5.3 Bourdieu's Theory of Practice: Voicing the Unspoken; 5.3.1 Makane: A Case in Point; 5.4 Conclusion; References
    Description / Table of Contents: Chapter 6: Exploring the Transactional Quality of Everyday Occupations Through Narrative-in-Action: Meaning-Making Among Women Living with Chronic Conditions6.1 Introduction; 6.2 Everyday Occupations as Transactions Within Local Cultures; 6.3 "Narrative-in-Action": Meaning Making Endeavors; 6.4 Everyday Transactions, Meaning Making in Everyday Occupations; 6.5 Everyday Transactions in Local Cultures; 6.6 Everyday Occupational Transactions Enacted and Embedded in Local Culture; References; Part II: Case Studies; Chapter 7: Navigating Cultural Spaces: A Transactional Perspective on Immigration
    Description / Table of Contents: 7.1 Introduction7.2 Current Perspectives on Immigration and Settlement; 7.3 A Transactional Perspective on Immigration and Settlement; 7.3.1 Navigating Cultural Spaces: A Case Study; 7.4 Implications for Science and Society; 7.4.1 Occupational Science Research; 7.4.2 Societal Practice; 7.5 Conclusion; References; Chapter 8: The Situated Nature of Disability; 8.1 Introduction; 8.2 Conceptualizing Disability: An Overview of Recent Controversies; 8.2.1 The International Classi fi cation of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICF)
    Description / Table of Contents: 8.3 Research Projects: Support for the Transactional Perspective on Disability
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    DOI: 10.1007/978-94-007-4429-5
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    URL: Cover
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    MPI Ethno. Forsch.
  • 89
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Globalisierung Süd (2013)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531199160
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (454 p)
    Series Statement: Leviathan Sonderhefte
    Parallel Title: Print version Globalisierung Süd
    DDC: 301
    RVK:
    MS 1170
    RVK:
    MS 1200
    RVK:
    MS 4410
    RVK:
    MH 10086
    Keywords: Electronic books ; Electronic books ; Aufsatzsammlung ; Konferenzschrift
    Abstract: Die soziale Welt hat sich seit 1989 grundlegend verändert. Man hatte ein „Ende der Geschichte" und die weltweite Ausbreitung westlicher Institutionen erwartet. Stattdessen ist die multizentrische Welt der Vergangenheit zurückgekehrt, in der auch Gesellschaften des globalen Südens eine Rolle spielen. Anhand konkreter Regional- und Länderbeispiele aus Afrika, Asien und Lateinamerika fragt der Band nach der Brauchbarkeit unseres theoretischen Vokabulars, nach angemessenen Kategorien zur Beschreibung langfristiger und grundlegender sozialer Wandlungsprozesse und damit auch nach der möglicherweise
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Einleitung; Literatur; I. Konturen und Varianten südlicher Staatlichkeit; Traditionelles Erbe, kolonialer Import, Opfer der Globalisierung? Geschichte und Perspektiven afrikanischer Staatlichkeit am Bei; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Globalisierung und die Zukunft des Staates; 2 Staatlichkeit in Afrika; 3 Ruandischer Exzeptionalismus?; Literatur; Staatlichkeit und Demokratie in Südostasien; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Einleitung; 2 Demokratie; 3 Staatlichkeit; 4 Demokratie in Südostasien; 5 Staatlichkeit in Südostasien; 6 Der Zusammenhang von Staatlichkeit und Demokratie; 7. Schluss
    Description / Table of Contents: LiteraturLateinamerikanische Wohlfahrtsstaaten zwischen Demokratisierungsund Globalisierungsdruck; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Der moderne Wohlfahrtsstaat unter Globalisierungsdruck; 2 Genese und zentrale Charakteristika lateinamerikanischer Wohlfahrtsstaaten vor der neoliberalen Wende; 3 Lateinamerikanische Wohlfahrtsstaaten zwischen neoliberalen Strukturreformen und wachsendem Demokratisierungsdruck; 4 Ausblick: Wohlfahrtsstaatsforschung dezentrieren: Multiple Modernities . Varieties of Welfare Capitalism; Literatur; II. Global policies , sub- und parastaatlich
    Description / Table of Contents: Globale Herausforderungen und die (Wieder-)Entstehung neo-traditioneller Landrechte. Rechtsanthropologische Untersuchungen in GuZusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Einleitung; 2 Bijagós: Vom Zentrum zur Peripherie; 3 Überblick über das kooperative Forschungsprojekt in Guinea-Bissau; 4 Konflikte um Landund Fischereirechte; 5 Ausblick; Literatur; Gestaltung .staatlicher. Policy im Schatten der Weltbank: Urbane Infrastruktur-Entwicklung, Zwangsumsiedlung und der listige Sta; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Einleitung; 2 Das Mumbai Urban Transport Project; 3 Verhandlungen über die MUTP-Umsiedlungspolicy
    Description / Table of Contents: 4 Pluralisierung von Recht und die Fragmentierung von Bürgerrechten5 Einbezug nicht-staatlicher Akteure bei der Policy-Implementierung: Bauunternehmen und NGOs; 6 Vergebliche Suche nach (quasi-)Rechtsmitteln: Beschwerdemechanismen auf mehreren Ebenen; 7 Durchsetzung von Bürgerrechten mit Rechtsmitteln; 8 Konklusion; Literatur; Sozialexperiment als neue Figuration von Wissenschaft, Politik und Markt im postkolonialen Afrika1; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Fragestellung: Therapeutische Herrschaft, Ausnahmezustand und Experimentalität; 2 Von der Unterentwicklung zum Ausnahmezustand?
    Description / Table of Contents: 3 Vom Experimentieren zur Experimentalität?4 Ausblick; Literatur; III. Neue soziale Bewegungen und Zivilgesellschaft; Lokale Traditionen und globale Erwartungen: Zivilgesellschaft in Südostasien; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; 1 Einleitung; 2 Erforschung und Analyse der Zivilgesellschaft(en) in Südostasien; 3 Zivilgesellschaft avant la lettre: traditionelle zivilgesellschaftliche Institutionen; 4 Lokale Traditionen und globale Modelle der Zivilgesellschaft; 5 Schluss; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Zivilgesellschaft in Afrika? Formen gesellschaftlicher Selbstorganisation im Spannungsfeld von Globalisierung und lokaler soziop
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
    KOBV
    HeBIS
  • 90
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Generationenbeziehungen : Herausforderungen und Potenziale (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531185101
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (209 p)
    Series Statement: Familie und Familienwissenschaft
    Parallel Title: Print version Generationenbeziehungen : Herausforderungen und Potenziale
    DDC: 305.2
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: In Zeiten eines demografischen Wandels, welcher durch eine zunehmende Individualisierung sowie eine abnehmende Selbstverständlichkeit und Zuverlässigkeit familialer Bindungen charakterisiert ist, bedarf das Thema der Generationenbeziehungen der besonderen Aufmerksamkeit und Zuwendung. Die Sorge um den Erhalt des Gemeinwesens, um die Sicherung des Humanvermögens und zentraler Fürsorge- und Sozialisationsaufgaben sowie um die 'Sicherung der Renten' verleiht diesem Thema zugleich eine bestimmte Brisanz. Während bisher die Eltern-Kind-Beziehung im Der Wissenschaftliche Beirat für Familienfragen berät seit nunmehr 40 Jahren das Bundesfamilienministerium in unabhängigen gutachterlichen Äußerungen zu familienpolitischen Themen. Zuletzt erschien von ihm 'Familie - Wissenschaft - Politik. Ein Kompendium zur Familienpolitik', das er anlässlich seines 40-jährigen Jubiläums vorgelegt hat.
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Verzeichnis der Tabellen; Verzeichnis der Abbildungen; 1 Generation und Generativität als Perspektive für Familienpolitik; 2 Generation - Konzeptuelle Klärung; 2.1 Zum Begriff der Generation2; 2.2 Charakteristika von Generationenbeziehungen; 2.3 Generativität als zentrale Aufgabe; 3 Gesellschaftliche Rahmenbedingungen der Gestaltung von Generationenbeziehungen; 3.1 Generationenbeziehungen in historischer Perspektive; 3.2 Demografische und familienstrukturelle Entwicklungen; 3.2.1 Demografische Trends; 3.2.2 Entwicklung des Generationenverhältnisses
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.3 Entwicklung familialer Generationenbeziehungen3.3 Ökonomische Rahmenbedingungen; 3.4 Rechtliche Rahmenbedingungen; 3.5 Sozialstaatliche Strukturierungen der Generationenbeziehungen; 4 Familiale Generationenbeziehungen am Beispiel von Großeltern und Enkelkindern; 4.1 Einleitung; 4.2 Großeltern und Enkel als Akteure im Generationengefüge; 4.2.1 Gelebte Beziehungen zwischen Großeltern und Enkelkindern; 4.2.2 Rahmenbedingungen der Beziehungen zwischen Großeltern und Enkel-kindern; 4.3 Leistungen der Generationen füreinander
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.4 Beziehungen zwischen Großeltern und Enkelkindern in ihren Rückwirkungen auf das Wohlbefinden5 Generationenbeziehungen außerhalb der Familie; 5.1 Veränderungen familialer Strukturen und die Frage nach den Beziehungen zwischen Generationen; 5.1.1 Der Rückgang generativen Verhaltens; 5.1.2 Fragilität von Familienbeziehungen; 5.2 Besonderheiten außerfamilialer Generationenbeziehungen; 5.2.1 Barrieren in der Gestaltung außerfamilialer Generationenbeziehungen; 5.2.2 Vom Geben und Nehmen in außerfamilialen Beziehungen
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.2.3 Die (relative) Altersunabhängigkeit außerfamilialer Generationenbezie-hungen5.3 Initiierung und Förderung von Generationenbeziehungen außerhalb der Familien; 5.3.1 Grundlegende Funktionen: Stärkung und Kompensation; 5.3.2 Institutionelle Voraussetzungen; 5.4 Modellprojekte, Initiativen und Praxisbeispiele in Deutschland; 5.4.1 Finanzielle und materielle Hilfen; 5.4.2 Instrumentelle Hilfen; 5.4.3 Weitergabe von Wissen, Werten und Fertigkeiten; 5.4.4 Gelegenheitsstrukturen für Begegnungen zwischen Alt und Jung; 5.4.5 Intergenerationelle Wohnoder Lebensformen
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.4.6 Modellprojekte, die eine Vielzahl von Zielen und Organisationsformen beinhalten6 Für eine aktive Unterstützung von Generationenbeziehungen: Empfehlungen des Beirats; 6.1 Stärkung und Ergänzung innerfamilialer Generationenbeziehungen; 6.2 Initiierung und Stützung außerfamilialer Generationenbeziehungen; 6.2.1 Voraussetzungen für Hilfen und Begegnungen schaffen; 6.2.2 Einrichtungen für generationenübergreifende Beziehungen öffnen; 6.2.3 Allgemeine Begegnungsräume schaffen; 6.2.4 Allgemeine Zeiträume für Begegnungen schaffen - Engagement zulassen!
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.3 Systematische Evaluation generationenübergreifender Projekte
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Rezension
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 91
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Humanität beruflicher Teilhabe im Zeichen der Inklusion : Kriterien für die Qualität der Beschäftigung von Menschen mit Behinderungen (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531192642
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (303 p)
    Series Statement: Gesundheitsförderung - Rehabilitation - Teilhabe v.1
    Parallel Title: Print version Humanität beruflicher Teilhabe im Zeichen der Inklusion : Kriterien für die Qualität der Beschäftigung von Menschen mit Behinderungen
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Kubek, Blanche Vanessa, 1979 - Humanität beruflicher Teilhabe im Zeichen der Inklusion
    DDC: 331.2
    RVK:
    DT 1460
    RVK:
    DT 1500
    RVK:
    MS 6270
    Keywords: People with disabilities Employment ; Law and legislation ; Electronic books ; Behinderter Mensch ; Berufliche Integration ; Arbeitsbedingungen
    Abstract: Das System der beruflichen Teilhabe von Menschen mit Behinderungen befindet sich in einem tiefgreifenden Umbruch, der insbesondere von den Schlagwörtern Inklusion und Teilhabe gekennzeichnet ist. Die Qualität der Rehabilitationsleistung hingegen tritt in der öffentlichen Diskussion in den Hintergrund. Jedoch geht es zentral um die Frage: Was ist gute Arbeit für Menschen mit Behinderungen? Das arbeitswissenschaftliche Verständnis von humaner Arbeit bietet einen wichtigen Anknüpfungspunkt. Vanessa Kubek greift das Konzept der humanen Arbeit auf, passt es an normative Zielsetzungen wie Inklusion, Selbstbestimmung und Teilhabe an und ergänzt es um die Sichtweise von Menschen mit Behinderungen. Auf diesem Wege entwickelt sie ein Leitbild "Humane berufliche Teilhabe" sowie Kriterien zur Analyse und Bewertung von Arbeitsplätzen.
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort; Inhaltsverzeichnis; ANHANG; Abbildungsverzeichnis; Tabellenverzeichnis; Abkürzungsverzeichnis; 1 Problemstellung und Aufbau der Arbeit; 1.1 Ausgangslage und Relevanz des Themas; 1.2 Ziele und Aufbau der Arbeit; 1.3 Präzisierung der Zielstellung „Humane berufliche Teilhabe"; 1.4 Spezifizierung der betrachteten Zielgruppe; 1.4.1 Internationaler Begriff der Behinderung nach WHO; 1.4.2 „Behinderung" nach SGB IX; 1.4.3 Der Personenkreis der „Werkstattbeschäftigten"; 2 Forschungsansatz und methodische Vorgehensweise
    Description / Table of Contents: 3 Berufliche Teilhabe von Menschen mit Behinderungen in unterschiedlichen Kontexten3.1 Das Recht auf berufliche Eingliederung: Ein historischer Abriss; 3.2 Kontext „allgemeiner" Arbeitsmarkt: Förderung der Teilhabe; 3.2.1 Unterstützte Beschäftigung; 3.2.2 Integrationsprojekte; 3.2.3 Budget für Arbeit; 3.3 Kontext „geschützter" Arbeitsmarkt: Werkstätten für behinderte Menschen; 3.3.1 Die Entwicklung der WfbM in Deutschland und deren gesetzlicherAuftrag; 3.3.2 Echtarbeit in WfbM; 4 Rechtliche und normative Grundlagen des Leitbildes „Humane berufliche Teilhabe"
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.1 Internationaler Paradigmenwechsel: Die UN-Behindertenrechtskonvention4.1.1 „Normalisierung" und „Integration" als Vorläufer der „Inklusion"; 4.1.2 Die UN-Konvention in ihren Grundzügen; 4.1.3 Inklusion vs. Integration?; 4.1.4 Inklusion in der Praxis: Wissenschaftliche Ansätze im Schulbereich; 4.1.5 Kritische Reflexion: Die Tragfähigkeit des Konstrukts „Inklusion" im Hinblick auf die Zielgruppe „schwerstmehrfachbehinderte" Menschen; 4.2 Normative „Setzungen" im Zuge des Paradigmenwechsels in Deutschland
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2.1 Leitlinien zur zukünftigen Ausgestaltung der Eingliederungshilfe von Politik, Verbänden und Wissenschaft4.2.2 Der behinderte Mensch als Kunde; 4.2.3 Schnittstelle WfbM - allgemeiner Arbeitsmarkt; 4.3 Zwischenfazit; 5 Die „Normalität" des „allgemeinen" Arbeitsmarkts- Garant für Humanität und Inklusion?; 5.1 Der deutsche Arbeitsmarkt im Spiegel allgemeiner Entwicklungstrends; 5.2 Der Stellenwert von Qualifikation auf dem Arbeitsmarkt; 5.3 Zwischenfazit; 6 Theoretische Grundlagen des Leitbildes „Humaneberufliche Teilhabe"; 6.1 Das arbeitswissenschaftliche Verständnis Humaner Arbeit
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.1.1 Personales Handeln im Kontext der Arbeit: Ausgewählte theoretische Zugänge6.1.2 Bewertung von Arbeitstätigkeiten: Arbeitswissenschaftliche Kriterien Humaner Arbeit; 6.1.3 Gestaltung von Arbeitstätigkeiten: Die Handlungsregulationstheorie als exemplarischer theoretischer Bezugsrahmen der Psychologischen Arbeitsanalyse; 6.2 Inklusions- und Exklusionstheorie; 6.3 Die Arbeitswelt und ihre Schnittstellen: Ökologischen Systemtheorie; 6.4 Zwischenfazit; 7 Das Leitbild „Humane berufliche Teilhabe" und Kriterien zur Analyse und Bewertung; 7.1 Entwicklung des Leitbildes
    Description / Table of Contents: 7.2 Analyse bewährter Instrumente zur Messung Humaner Arbeit
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 92
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Peace Psychology in Australia (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9781461414025
    Language: English
    Pages: Online-Ressource (372 p.)
    Edition: Online-Ausg. 2012 Electronic reproduction; Available via World Wide Web
    Series Statement: Peace Psychology Book Series
    Series Statement: Peace Psychology Book Ser.
    Parallel Title: Print version Peace Psychology in Australia
    DDC: 303.6/9
    Keywords: Conflict (Psychology) ; Violence ; Peace-building ; Australia.. ; Peace ; Psychological aspects.. ; Conflict management ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: This book is a case study of the development of peace psychology in Australia. While there is, in comparison to other countries, relatively little overt violence, Australia the nation was founded on the dispossession of Indigenous people, and their oppression continues today. Peace Psychology in Australia covers the most significant issues of peace and conflict in the country. It begins with a review of conflict resolution practices among Australia's ancient Indigenous cultures and succinctly captures topics of peace and conflict which the country has faced in the past 222 years since British
    Description / Table of Contents: Peace Psychologyin Australia; Foreword; Biography; Acknowledgements; Contents; Contributors; A Brief History of Australiaa; Chapter 1: Introduction; 1.1 Bringing This Book Together; 1.2 Defining and Representing Peace Psychology in Australia; 1.3 Embodying the Values of Peace Psychology; 1.3.1 Acknowledging the Importance of the Geo-Historical Context; 1.3.2 Outlining the Importance of Episodic and Structural Violence; 1.3.3 Multiple-Level Analysis; 1.4 Embodying Peace Values and Processes; 1.4.1 Explicitly and Openly Acknowledging the Underlying Values of Peace Psychology
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.4.2 Acknowledging the Contributions from the Pioneers1.4.3 Mentoring and Providing Opportunities for Younger Contributors; 1.4.4 Furthering the Development of Peace Psychology; 1.5 Terminology and the Review Process; 1.6 The Structure and Content of This Volume; 1.6.1 Part I; 1.6.2 Part II; 1.6.3 Part III; References; Part I: The Geohistorical Context of Peace Psychology in Australia; Chapter 2: An Overview of Traditional Forms of Indigenous Conflict Resolution and Peace in Australia; 2.1 About the Authors; 2.2 Background; 2.3 Sacred History; 2.4 Ritual, Lore and Law
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.5 Social and Kinship Structures2.6 Infractions of the Lore, Conflict and Ceremony; 2.6.1 The Prun Ceremony; 2.6.2 The Nathagura Ceremony; 2.7 The Role of Combat and Conflict Expression; 2.7.1 The Makarrata Ceremony; 2.7.2 The Atninga Ceremony; 2.8 Ceremonial Attention to Disputes: Restoring Cooperative Relationship; References; Chapter 3: Indigenous and 'Settler' Relationships, Episodic and Structural Violence; 3.1 Introduction; 3.2 Background; 3.3 Stage 1: Invasion, Dispossession and Genocide; 3.4 Stage 2: Protection and Assimilation; 3.5 Stage 3: The Struggle for Self-determination
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.6 Where Have We Come To?3.7 Where to from Here?; 3.8 International Context; 3.9 Some Reflections on How This Geohistorical Context Relates to Peace Psychology Practice and Research; 3.10 Conclusion; References; Chapter 4: Immigration, Multiculturalism and the Changing Face of Australia; 4.1 Who Is Australian?; 4.2 Becoming an Australian; 4.3 We Are All Just Different; 4.4 We Are All Simply the Same; 4.5 Meeting in the Middle; 4.6 Making Multiculturalism Work; 4.7 Conclusion; References; Chapter 5: A History of 'Psychologists for Peace' in Australia
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.1 The Context Surrounding the Establishment of PPOW5.1.1 The Growth of Peace Psychology Organisations Across the Globe; 5.1.2 Australia and the Nuclear Threat; 5.1.3 The Formation of PPOW; 5.2 Group Aims and Activities; 5.2.1 PPOW Aims and Activities During the Cold War; 5.2.1.1 Fostering Studies of Peace and Conflict Resolution; 5.2.2 PFP Aims and Activities Post Cold War; 5.2.2.1 Recent and Current Activities; 5.3 Conclusion; References; Chapter 6: National Identity, Australian Values and Outsiders; 6.1 What Are Australian Identity and Values?; 6.1.1 A Descriptive, Historical Overview
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.1.1.1 Outsiders Inside
    Note: Description based upon print version of record , Electronic reproduction; Available via World Wide Web
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 93
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Die Gesellschaft des Geldes (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531171463
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (251 p.)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Series Statement: Wirtschaft + Gesellschaft
    Parallel Title: Print version Die Gesellschaft des Geldes
    DDC: 306.3
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Ausgehend von Simmels als Gesellschaftstheorie nach wie vor untersch tzter "Philosophie des Geldes" ber den Keynesianismus bis hin zu neuesten Beitr gen zur Geldtheorie skizziert der Autor eine Theorie der Moderne, die dem Geld nicht nur f r den Bereich der konomie, sondern als Medium der Vergesellschaftung eine Schl sselstellung zuweist
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Vorwort; Collateral damage - Über das Alte im Neuen des Finanzmarktkapitalismus; I.; II.; III.; IV.; V.; Literatur; Vorbemerkung; A. Grundlagen; 1. Was heißt Soziologie des Geldes?; I. Soziologie und Ökonomie; II. Geld als Form und System; III. Beiträge zur Soziologie des Geldes; 2. Soziale Differenzierung und monetäre Integration; I. Geld und soziale Differenzierung; II. Genealogie der Gabe; III. Tausch - Wert - Geld; IV. Die enträtselte Wertform; B. Kritik; 3. Das Geld der Ökonomen; I. Neutrales Geld; II. Der Wechselkurs oder der Traum vom Ende der Transzendenz
    Description / Table of Contents: 4. Simmel, ökonomischI. Kritik der Quantitätstheorie; II. Von der Dialektik des Geldes zur Spekulation; 5. Die keynesianische Revolution; I. Der Monetarismus; II. Ungewißheit, Geld und Zins; 6. Die Eigentumstheorie vor der Geschichte; I. Folgen des Eigentums; II. Die antike Geldwirtschaft; C. Ortsbestimmung; 7. Die Dynamik der Geldwirtschaft und die Spekulation; I. Reflexives Geld, Wachstum und Krise; II. Behavioral Finance; III. Blasen; 8. Die Legitimität des Geldes; I. Geld und Religion; II. Zentralbankkunst; III. Contrat monétaire; IV. Coda; Die Gesellschaft des Geldes
    Description / Table of Contents: Literaturverzeichnis
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 94
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Mensch-Computer-Interaktion (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783642135064
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (390 p.)
    Series Statement: X.media.press
    Series Statement: X. media. press Ser.
    Parallel Title: Erscheint auch als Heinecke, Andreas M. Mensch-Computer-Interaktion
    DDC: 302.23/1
    RVK:
    ST 278
    Keywords: Human-computer interaction ; Electronic books ; Electronic books ; Mensch-Maschine-Kommunikation ; Softwareergonomie ; Informationsverarbeitung ; Faktor Mensch ; Benutzerfreundlichkeit ; Benutzerführung ; Benutzeroberfläche ; Multimedia ; Mensch-Maschine-Kommunikation ; Softwareergonomie ; Informationsverarbeitung ; Faktor Mensch ; Benutzerfreundlichkeit ; Benutzerführung ; Benutzeroberfläche ; Multimedia ; Dialogsystem
    Abstract: Jeder hat schon die Erfahrung gemacht, dass Webseiten nicht lesbar sind oder Programme unverst ndliche Meldungen hervorbringen. Kurz: Die Software ist nicht gebrauchstauglich. Ausgehend von der menschlichen Informationsverarbeitung legt der Autor dar, wie Schnittstellen beschaffen sein m ssen und wie bei der Entwicklung vorgegangen werden muss, damit die Software gebrauchstauglich wird. Dabei werden neueste Normen und Vorschriften ber cksichtigt. Die begleitende Website bietet weitere Beispiele und bungsaufgaben, L sungen und weiterf hrende Links
    Description / Table of Contents: Motivation; Inhaltsverzeichnis; 1 Begriffe und Modelle; Lernziele; Voruberlegungen; 1.1 Geschichtliche Entwicklung der Rechnerbenutzung; 1.1.1 Erste Rechneranwendungen; 1.1.2 Erste interaktive Systeme; 1.1.3 Fernschreiber und Kommandos; 1.1.4 Alphanumerische Bildschirme, Masken und Menüs; 1.1.5 Semigrafik und Positioniergeräte; 1.1.6 Vollgrafik und direkte Manipulation; 1.1.7 Audioverarbeitung und Spracheingabe; 1.1.8 Videoverarbeitung und Gestik; 1.1.9 Virtuelle Umgebungen und Augmented Reality; 1.2 Medien bei der Rechnerbenutzung; 1.2.1 Einteilung der Medien zur Interaktion
    Description / Table of Contents: 1.2.1.1 Diskrete und kontinuierliche Medien1.2.1.2 Gliederung der Medien nach Perzeption; 1.2.1.3 Gliederung nach Präsentation; 1.2.1.4 Gliederung nach Speicherung; 1.2.1.5 Gliederung nach Übertragung; 1.2.1.6 Gliederung nach Repräsentation; 1.2.2 Multimedia; 1.2.3 Hypertext; 1.2.4 Hypermedia; 1.3 Modelle der Mensch-Computer-Interaktion; 1.3.1 Benutzungsschnittstelle; 1.3.2 Benutzung im Kontext; Nachbereitung; 1.4 Ubungsaufgaben; 2 Software-Ergonomie; Lernziele; Voruberlegungen; 2.1 Gestaltung von Mensch-Rechner-Systemen; 2.1.1 Gestaltungsziele; 2.1.1.1 Ergonomische Gestaltung
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1.1.2 Belastung und Beanspruchung2.1.1.3 Ziele menschengerechter Gestaltung; 2.1.1.4 Gebrauchstauglichkeit (Usability); 2.1.1.5 Benutzererlebnis (User Experience); 2.1.2 Gestaltungsebenen; 2.2 Rechtliche Anforderungen; 2.2.1 Bildschirmrichtlinie und Bildschirmarbeitsverordnung; 2.2.2 Barrierefreie Informationstechnik-Verordnung (BITV); 2.3 Software-Ergonomie als interdisziplinares Gebiet; 2.3.1 Beteiligte Wissenschaftsgebiete; 2.3.2 Arbeitsweisen der Software-Ergonomie; 2.3.3 Stand des Wissens; Nachbereitung; 2.4 Ubungsaufgaben; 3 Physiologie der menschlichen Informationsverarbeitung
    Description / Table of Contents: LernzieleVoruberlegungen; 3.1 Modelle menschlicher Informationsverarbeitung; 3.1.1 Der Mensch als informationsverarbeitendes System; 3.1.2 Das Rasmussen-Modell; 3.2 Reizubertragung und Speicherung; 3.2.1 Verarbeitung von Sinnesreizen; Reizweiterleitung in Nerven; Nervennetze; 3.2.2 Gedachtnis und Prozessoren; Prozessoren; Kurzzeitspeicher; Langzeitspeicher; 3.3 Sinne des Menschen; 3.3.1 Visuelles System; Aufbau und Funktion des Auges; Gesichtsfeld und Augenbewegungen; Flimmern; 3.3.2 Auditives System; 3.3.3 Haptik; Tastsinn; Wärmeempfinden; Kinasthese; Gleichgewichtssinn
    Description / Table of Contents: Schatten
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.3.4 Weitere Sinne und ihre Relevanz fur die MCIGeruchssinn; Geschmackssinn; Nachbereitung; 3.4 Ubungsaufgaben; 4 Psychologie der menschlichen Informationsverarbeitung; Lernziele; Voruberlegungen; 4.1 Psychologie der visuellen Wahrnehmung; 4.1.1 Gestaltgesetze; Gesetz der Nähe; Gesetz der Gleichartigkeit; Zusammenwirken von Gestaltgesetzen: Nähe und Gleichheit; Gesetz der guten Fortsetzung; Zusammenwirken von Gestaltgesetzen: Gute Fortsetzung und Gleichheit; Gesetz der Schließung; Prinzip der guten Gestalt; 4.1.2 Tiefenwahrnehmung; Stereoskopisches Sehen; Statische Perspektive; Verdeckung
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 95
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Mythos Strategie (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783834935960
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (244 p.)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Parallel Title: Print version Mythos Strategie
    DDC: 302.14
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: In diesem Buch stellen 15 Unternehmen ihre Erfolgsstrategien vor, die alle auf demselben Konzept beruhen: der Engpasskonzentrieren Strategie (EKS) von Professor Wolfgang Mewes. Und diese Strategie basiert nicht auf Kampf, sondern auf Integration und Kooperation. Sie ist das einzige Strategiemodell, das sich konsequent am Nutzen der Kunden ausrichtet und dar ber hinaus den eigenen Erfolg optimiert. Eine sehr inspirierende Lekt re nun in der 2., aktualisierten und erg nzten Auflage
    Description / Table of Contents: Die Alternative: NutzenmaximierungDie Vorteile der Nutzenmaximierung; Alles bereit zur Wende?; All you need is love; Literatur; Teil II Von der Existenzgründung biszur Marktführerschaft; Von der Nische zum Weltmarktführer -die Belimo AG; Interview mit Anton Heinrich Hütte, Mitgründer und langjährigerVerwaltungsratspräsident der Belimo AG in der Schweiz; Belimo AG aktuell - Interview mit Jacques Sanche, CEO derBelimo Holding AG; Literatur; 28 Jahre ununterbrochenes Wachstum- der Welterfolg des UnternehmensKärcher; Turnaround; Drei Schritte zum Erfolg
    Description / Table of Contents: Beendigung der erfolglosen DiversifikationsversucheSechs Jahre Konzentration auf das KerngeschäftHochdruckreiniger; 16 Jahre Konzentration auf Teilbereiche des GrundbedarfsReinigung; Globalisierung des Unternehmens; Erweiterung der Produktpalette; Innovationen; Firmenkäufe; 28 Jahre Wachstum - strategisch geplant; Erfolgsthesen; Literatur; Von der Meisterkabine bis zumpatentierten Messraum - die Schritt-für-Schritt-Strategie; Die Urlaubssonne geht auf -steiniger Weg zur Marktführerschaftrund um die Adria; Belohnung für Kundennutzen - dieEntwicklung der Assmann BüromöbelGmbH
    Description / Table of Contents: LiteraturMarktführer gegen den Branchentrend -Town & Country-Haus; Unternehmensprofil; Interview mit Jürgen Dawo; Enorme Wachstumsmöglichkeiten durchFranchising; Schöpfe und programmiere!; Der Nutzen unserer Systemzentrale für die Franchisenehmer; 1. Produktion; 2. Einkauf; 3. Administration; 4. Finanz-Management; 5. Verkaufsunterstützung; 6. Schulung der Franchisenehmer; 7. Ergebnis; Ausblick; Die Bedeutung der Strategie für denErfolg von Franchise-Systemen; Know-how als Erfolgsfaktor; Was heißt eigentlich Strategie?; Franchisemodelle hinterfragen; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorteile für die Franchisepartner bei derstandortindividuellen Strategie
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort; Inhaltsverzeichnis; Teil I Kundennutzen - das A und O der Strategie; Mythos Strategie - mit der richtigenStrategie zur Marktführerschaft; Strategie und Mythos; Von der Langfristplanung zur Meta-Strategie; Entwicklung von Strategiekonzepten; Der Paukenschlag 1970; Die „richtige" Strategie; Strategie ohne Mythos; Differenzierung herkömmlicher Strategien und der EKS; Strategie und Methodik; Literatur; Säe Nutzen - ernte Gewinn; Gesetzmäßigkeiten der Natur gelten auch im Management; Spitz statt breit!; Auf den Punkt!; Wie wird die EKS eingesetzt?; Auslaufmodell Gewinnmaximierung; Bilanz
    Description / Table of Contents: Interview mit dem geschäftsführenden Gesellschafter,Dirk AßmannMarktführer mit Backöfen -die Wiesheu GmbH; Start in der Garage; Interview mit Karlheinz Wiesheu; Nach der Existenzgründung zügig zumBörsengang - die Microlog Logistics AG; Interview mit Rolf van den Berg; Vom Handwerksbetrieb zum Kundenstar- Elektro Knies; Existenzgründung: Vom Auszubildendenzum heimlichen Marktführer; Der innovative Gedanke; Umgesetzte Grundsätze; Teil III Marktführer werden per Franchise; Franchising - der Turbolader für KleinundMittelbetriebe; Zwei Wege zum Erfolg; Was ist Franchising?; Zukunft Franchise
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 96
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Fokus Intersektionalität : Bewegungen und Verortungen eines vielschichtigen Konzeptes (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531195490
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (268 p)
    Edition: 2nd ed
    Series Statement: Geschlecht und Gesellschaft v.47
    Parallel Title: Print version Fokus Intersektionalität : Bewegungen und Verortungen eines vielschichtigen Konzeptes
    DDC: 305.3
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Die hier versammelten Beiträge spiegeln den aktuellen Stand der Debatte um Intersektionalität 20 Jahre nach Prägung des Begriffes im Schwarzen Feminismus in den USA. Bei seiner transatlantischen Reise durchlief der Ansatz Metamorphosen und fiel in Europa auf vorbereiteten Boden, insbesondere in anglophonen und deutschsprachigen feministischen Diskursen. Klasse, Geschlecht, Ethnizität und „Rasse", Sexualität, Behinderung, Alter und andere Dimensionen von Ungleichheit und Identität werden inzwischen in intersektioneller Perspektive untersucht. In diesem Band wird der Ansatz vorgestellt und in tr
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Vorbemerkung zur korrigierten zweiten Auflage; Fokus Intersektionalität - eine Einleitung; Gründungsnarrative; Stand der Debatten; Von der Frauen- und Geschlechterforschung zur feministischen Intersektionalitätsforschung ?; Literatur; I. Die transatlantische Reise von Intersektionalität - Geografi en und Räume der Debatte; Die Intersektion von „Rasse"und Geschlecht demarginalisieren:Eine Schwarze feministische Kritikam Antidiskriminierungsrecht, der feministischenTheorie und der antirassistischen Politik1; Der Bezugsrahmen der Antidiskriminierung
    Description / Table of Contents: Feminismus und Schwarze Frauen: „Sind wir denn keine Frauen ?"Wann und wo ich eintrete: Die Integration von Sexismus in Schwarze Befreiungspolitiken; Die Erweiterung feministischer Theorie und antirassistischer Politik durch Intersektionalität; Literatur; Intersektionalität als „Buzzword"; Das „fundamentale Anliegen"; Der überraschende Perspektivwechsel; GeneralistInnen und SpezialistInnen; Mehrdeutigkeit und Unvollständigkeit; Intersektionalität - eine Erfolgsgeschichte ?; Literatur; Die diskursiven Politiken feministischer Intersektionalität; Intersektionen, Systeme und Diskurse
    Description / Table of Contents: AusblickLiteratur; Vernachlässigte Intersektionalitäten in der Männerforschung: Alter(n), Virtualität, Transnationalität; Männerforschung und Intersektionalität; Hegemoniale Männlichkeit und die Hegemonie von Männern; Die Hegemonie von Männern und vernachlässigte Intersektionalitäten; Versäumnis 1: Alter(n), Behinderungen, ältere Männer, Verkörperlichung; Versäumnis 2: Virtualität, „virtuelle Männer"; Versäumnis 3: Transnationalität, transnationale Männer; Schlussbemerkungen; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Enthüllungen und Unsichtbarkeiten: Medien, Männlichkeitskonzepte und Kriegsnarrative in intersektioneller PerspektiveEnthüllungen und Unsichtbarkeiten in den Medien: Die Bedeutungen von Gewalt; Präsenz und Unsichtbarkeit in der Forschung: Analysekategorien und ihre Bedeutungen; Literatur; Sexualität und Migrationsforschung: Das Unsichtbare, das Oxymoronische und heteronormatives „Othering"; (Un)Sichtbarkeiten; Codierungen von gleichgeschlechtlichem Begehren; Queering Migrationsforschung; Staatliche Interventionen; Intersektionen; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: Psychosoziale Intersektionen: Zur Kontextualisierung von Lebenserzählungen Erwachsener aus ethnisch sichtbar diff erentenHaushalten
    Description / Table of Contents: Frameworks und „Rahmungsarbeit"Intersektionelle Rahmung und institutionalisierte Diskurse über Rechte; Schlussfolgerungen; Literatur; II. Neue Forschungsfelder der Intersektionalität: Männlichkeiten und Heteronormativität; Marginalisierte Männlichkeit, Prekarisierung und die Ordnung der Geschlechter; Marginalisierte Männlichkeit - eine widersprüchliche Konstellation; Erschöpfung oder Beharrung männlicher Herrschaft ? Gesellschaftlicher Wandel und Wandel im Geschlechterverhältnis; Die ernsten Spiele des Wettbewerbs ? Die Reproduktion männlicher Herrschaft mit Hilfe hegemonialer Männlichkeit
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 97
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Integrierte Unternehmenskommunikation in international tätigen Unternehmen : Entwicklung eines länderübergreifenden Modells zur prozessorientierten Gestaltung der Integration von Kommunikationsaktivitäten und Kommunikationsmitteln und dessen Anwendung auf ein Un (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783834825070
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (329 p)
    Series Statement: Schriften zur Medienproduktion
    Parallel Title: Print version Integrierte Unternehmenskommunikation in international tätigen Unternehmen : Entwicklung eines länderübergreifenden Modells zur prozessorientierten Gestaltung der Integration von Kommunikationsaktivitäten und Kommunikationsmitteln und dessen Anwendung auf ein Un
    DDC: 302.2
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Agnes Schipanski entwickelt auf Basis einer umfangreichen Literaturanalyse ein umfassendes Modell der international integrierten Unternehmenskommunikation, das transnational orientiert ist. Dabei spielen Managementfunktionen, die transnationale und transkulturelle Strategie sowie die Prozessorganisation eine zentrale Rolle. Kern des Modells ist ein Reorganisationsprozess, dessen Ergebnis eine transnational modulare Kommunikationsorganisation mit Netzwerkcharakter ist. Sie zeichnet sich durch modulare Organisationseinheiten, die Dezentralisierung von strategischen Entscheidungskompetenzen und e
    Description / Table of Contents: Geleitwort; Vorwort; Zusammenfassung; Abstract; Inhaltsverzeichnis; Abbildungsverzeichnis; Tabellenverzeichnis; Abkürzungsverzeichnis; 1 Einführung; 1.1 Ausgangssituation - Wandel auf gesellschaftlicher, wirtschaftlicher und technologischer Ebene; 1.2 Stand der Forschung zur Gestaltung der international integrierten Unternehmenskommunikation; 1.2.1 Status quo der Forschung; 1.2.2 Kritische Würdigung der Ansätze; 1.3 Zielsetzung und forschungsleitende Fragen; 1.4 Aufbau der Arbeit; 2 Kommunikationsmanagement in international tätigen Unternehmen
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.1 Begriffsdefinition des internationalen Kommunikationsmanagements2.1.1 Internationales Kommunikationsmanagement als Teilbereich des internationalen Managements; 2.1.2 Das interkulturelle, transkulturelle und transnationale Kommunikationsmanagement; 2.2 Internationale Kommunikationsplanung im Hinblick auf die Integration; 2.2.1 Situationsanalyse durch die internationale Marktforschung; 2.2.2 Internationale Kommunikationsplanung auf der Führungsebene; 2.2.3 Internationale Kommunikationsplanung auf Ebene der Fachabteilungen; 2.3 Internationaler Einsatz der Kommunikationsmaßnahmen und -mittel
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3.1 Informationsmanagement als Dienstleister für Kommunikationsprozesse2.3.2 Internationale Durchführung der Kommunikationsmaßnahmen; 2.4 Internationale Kommunikationsorganisation im Hinblick auf die Integration; 2.4.1 Unternehmenskommunikation als Teilsystem des internationalen Unternehmens; 2.4.2 Gestaltungsdimensionen des Teilsystems Unternehmenskommunikation; 2.4.3 Kommunikative Organisationsformen von international tätigen Unternehmen - das multinationale Organisationsmodell; 2.5 Internationales kommunikatives Personalmanagement im Hinblick auf die Integration
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.5.1 Allgemeine Grundsätze2.5.2 Internationale Personalmanagementstrategien; 2.5.3 Personalbedarfsermittlung; 2.5.4 Personalbeschaffung; 2.5.5 Personalauswahl, Stellenbesetzungsstrategien und Auslandseinsätze; 2.5.6 Personalentwicklung; 2.5.7 Personalführung; 2.6 Internationale Kontrolle und Controlling im Hinblick auf die Integration; 3 Grundlagen der Reorganisation; 3.1 Charakteristika und Ziele der Reorganisation; 3.2 Reorganisationsformen für international tätige Unternehmen; 3.2.1 Das transnationale Organisationsmodell
    Description / Table of Contents: 3.2.2 Die modulare Organisation als Ausprägung des transnationalen Organisationsmodells3.3 Organisation der Reorganisation; 3.4 Management von Reorganisationen; 4 Modell der international integrierten Unternehmenskommunikation - Gestaltung und Etablierung der transnational modularen Kommunikationsorganisation mit Netzwerkcharakter; 4.1 Begriffsbestimmung der international integrierten Unternehmenskommunikation; 4.2 Die transnational modulare Kommunikationsorganisation mit Netzwerkcharakter als Rahmenkonzept der Integration; 4.2.1 Spezialisierung; 4.2.2 Koordination
    Description / Table of Contents: 4.2.3 Entscheidungsdelegation
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 98
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Wertschöpfung und Beschäftigung in Deutschland (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783642202032
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (113 p)
    Series Statement: acatech Diskutiert
    Series Statement: Acatech DISKUTIERT Ser.
    Parallel Title: Print version Wertschöpfung und Beschäftigung in Deutschland
    DDC: 306.3094/09033
    Keywords: Job creation ; Germany.. ; Labor supply ; Germany ; Electronic books ; Electronic books
    Abstract: Spätestens mit Beginn der Finanzkrise ist das Thema Wirtschaftswachstum und damit Wertschöpfung in den Vordergrund des öffentlichen Interesses gerückt. Die anhaltende Diskussion um begrenzte Ressourcen und den demografischen Wandel verstärkt in Teilen der Gesellschaft das Misstrauen gegenüber dem sogenannten „Wirtschaftswachstum". Dieser Band diskutiert die Frage, wie wohlstandsmehrendes Wachstum bei begrenzten Ressourcen und den anstehenden demografischen Veränderungen möglich ist und plädiert für eine neue Art von Wachstum: Wachstum, das einerseits den Wohlstand und das Beschäftigungsniveau
    Description / Table of Contents: Title Page; Copyright Page; Table of Contents; 〉 DEUTSCHLAND BRAUCHT WERTSCHÖPFUNGS WACHSTUM- EINFÜHRUNG; 1 TRIEBKRÄFTE FÜR INNOVATION, WACHSTUM UND BESCHÄFTIGUNG; Unternehmertum; Technikwissenschaftlicher Nachwuchs und hochqualifizierte Fachkräfte; Visionäre Kraft; Innovationsfördernde Kultur der Zusammenarbeit von Wirtschaft und Wissenschaft; Innovationsklima; 2 GESTALTUNGSFELD PRODUKTION UND PRODUKTENTSTEHUNG; 3 ZIELSETZUNG DES acatech PROJEKTES „WERTSCHÖPFUNG UND BESCHÄFTIGUNG IN DEUTSCHLAND"; 〉 HEUTIGE UND ZUKÜNFTIGE PARADIGMEN DES PRODUKTIONSSTANDORTS DEUTSCHLAND; MANAGEMENT SUMMARY
    Description / Table of Contents: 1 BEDEUTUNG DES PRODUKTIONSSEKTORS FÜR DEUTSCHLAND2 GESTALTUNGSDIMENSIONEN DER PRODUKTIONSPARADIGMEN; 2.1 AUSRICHTUNG DES PRODUKTIONSSYSTEMS; 2.2 KOMPLEXITÄT UND VARIANTENVIELFALT; 2.3 FOKUSSIERUNG VON WERTSCHÖPFUNGSNETZWERKEN; 2.4 AUSGESTALTUNG DER QUALITÄTSSICHERUNG; 2.5 ENTWICKLUNG VON PRODUKTIONSKOSTEN; 2.6 ENTWICKLUNG DES PRODUKTIONSPLANUNGSVERSTÄNDNISSES; 2.7 ENTWICKLUNG DES HUMANKAPITALS; 3 DIE STRATEGISCHEN ERFOLGSPOSITIONEN DER ZUKUNFT UNTER DEM EINFLUSS GLOBALER METATRENDS; 3.1 GLOBALE METATRENDS, DIE DIE PRODUKTIONSPARADIGMEN VERÄNDERN; Verschiebung von Märkten
    Description / Table of Contents: Ressourcenknappheit und NachhaltigkeitGlobalisierung von Wissen; Zunehmende Dynaxität; Globalisierung von Wertschöpfungsketten und Risikomanagement; 3.2 DIE STRATEGISCHEN ERFOLGSPOSITIONEN DER ZUKUNFT; Global effizienter Ressourceneinsatz; Ganzheitliche Betrachtung und Planung von Supply-Chain-Kosten und -Risiken; Wandlungsfähigkeit von Produktionssystemen; Entwicklung und strategische Nutzung von Fertigkeitseliten; Innovative Produkte aus verketteten Produktionsprozessen; 4 HANDLUNGSEMPFEHLUNGEN FÜR DEN PRODUKTIONSSTANDORT DEUTSCHLAND
    Description / Table of Contents: Mitarbeiterqualifizierung und Wissensmanagement vorantreibenAktive Gestaltung/Management von Wertschöpfungsnetzwerken; Interdisziplinarisierung der Entwicklung; Nutzenorientierte Geschäftsmodelle; Ganzheitliches Risikomanagement entwickeln; 5 FAZIT; LITERATUR; 〉 EMERGING MARKETS BEI MATERIELLEN GRENZEN DES WACHSTUMS - CHANCEN NACHHALTIGER WERTSCHÖPFUNG; MANAGEMENT SUMMARY; 1 HERAUSFORDERUNGEN; 1.1 ENERGIE; 1.2 BEDARFE UND VERFÜGBARKEIT; 1.3 KLIMA; 1.4 UNGLEICHHEIT, GEWALTKONFLIKTE, TERROR UND KRIEG; 2 CHANCEN UND LÖSUNGSANSÄTZE; 2.1 MÄRKTE UND TECHNOLOGIEENTWICKLUNG; 2.2 ENTWICKLUNGSANSÄTZE
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.3 NACHHALTIGE WERTSCHÖPFUNGSNETZE2.4 VERMITTLUNGSPRODUKTIVITÄT; LITERATUR; 〉 INTEGRATIVE PRODUKTIONSTECHNIK FÜR HOCHLOHNLÄNDER; MANAGEMENT SUMMARY; 1 PRODUKTION IN HOCHLOHNLÄNDERN; 1.1 HOCHLOHNLÄNDER UNTER WETTBEWERBSDRUCK; 1.2 DAS POLYLEMMA DER PRODUKTION IN HOCHLOHNLÄNDERN; 1.3 RELEVANTE ZIELBRANCHEN UND PRODUKTSEGMENTE FÜR HOCHLOHNLÄNDER; 1.4 ZIELSYSTEM FÜR DIE PRODUKTIONSTECHNISCHE FORSCHUNG; 2 FORSCHUNGSFELDER DER INTEGRATIVEN PRODUKTIONSTECHNIK; 2.1 INDIVIDUALISIERUNG DER PRODUKTION; 2.2 VIRTUALISIERUNG UND DIGITALISIERUNG DER PRODUKTION; 2.3 HYBRIDISIERUNG DER PRODUKTION
    Description / Table of Contents: 2.4 SELBSTOPTIMIERUNG IN DER PRODUKTION
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext  (lizenzpflichtig)
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    BSZ
    GBV
  • 99
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Management von Medienunternehmen : Digitale Innovationen - crossmediale Strategien (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783834942555
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (300 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Parallel Title: Print version Management von Medienunternehmen : Digitale Innovationen - crossmediale Strategien
    DDC: 302.23068
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: Die Digitalisierung hat die Distribution von Medieninhalten in den letzten 20 Jahren revolutioniert. Die digitalen Übertragungswege zur Verbreitung von Medieninhalten werden kontinuierlich verbessert: hochauflösendes TV, mobile Endgeräte, drahtlose Datenverbindungen, Video-on-Demand-Plattformen, Home Entertainment sind dabei die wichtigsten Schlagworte. Was bedeutet das nun für die Redaktionen sowie für die Prozessorganisation eines Medienunternehmens? Das vorliegende Fachbuch liefert einen aktuellen Überblick über die Entwicklungen im Rezipientenmarkt, den Hardwaremarkt, den Lizenzmarkt, den
    Description / Table of Contents: Vorwort; Inhaltsverzeichnis; Einleitung: Management von Medienunternehmen zwischen Konvergenz und Crossmedia; 1. Einleitung; 2. Konvergenz und Crossmedia: Eine Bestandsaufnahme; 2.1 Konvergenz; 2.2 Crossmedia; 2.3 Vorgehensweise zur Einführung einer Crossmedia-Strategie; 3. Zur Struktur des Sammelbandes; 3.1 Market-based View und Resource-based View als Strukturrahmen; 3.2 Vorstellung und Einordnung der Einzelbeiträge; 4. Fazit und Ausblick; 5. Literatur; 6. Die Autoren; Teil I Konvergenz: Der Market-based View; Medienmärkte im Umbruch
    Description / Table of Contents: Zuschauermarkt: Veränderungen des Nutzungsverhaltens und Herausforderungen für die Rezeptionsmessung1. Einleitung; 2. Gerätebesitz; 3. Nutzungsverhalten; 3.1 Angebot und Nutzung von Fernsehen; 3.2 Motivationen für Mediennutzung; 3.3 Stellenwert des Internets im Mediamix; 4. Konkurrenz der Mediengattungen; 5. Daten für den Medienmarkt: Konvergenzwährungen; 6. Ausblick; 7. Literatur; 8. Die Autorin; Gerätemarkt: Praxisbericht zu Technologien und Geschäftsmodellen abseits des klassischen linearen TV; 1. Einleitung; 2. Die Übertragung von audiovisuellen Inhalten auf PC/Mac-Endgeräte
    Description / Table of Contents: 3. Die Übertragung von audiovisuellen Inhalten via Smartphone und Tablet4. Die Übertragung von audiovisuellen Inhalten auf TV-Endgeräte; 4.1 Die Übertragung von Inhalten via Satellit und DVB-T; 4.2 Die Übertragung von Inhalten via DVB-C und IPTV; 4.3 Übertragung von Inhalten über das offene Internet; 4.4 Zwischenfazit; 5. Geschäftsmodelle: Chancen und Herausforderungen; 5.1 Lineare Angebote; 5.2 Nicht-lineare Angebote; 5.3 Unterscheidung der Angebote nach der Länge der Inhalte; 5.4 Illegale Angebote; 6. Zusammenfassung und Ausblick; 6.1 Proprietäre Systeme; 6.2 App-Stores; 6.3 Heimvernetzung
    Description / Table of Contents: 6.4 Fazit7. Der Autor; Status quo und Ausblick der TV-und Video-Lizenzen; 1. Technische Entwicklung und Konsumentenverhalten treiben den Markt; 2. Rechte und Lizenzen; 2.1 Nutzungsrechte; 2.2 Digitales Rechtemanagement; 2.3 Typen von Lizenzverträgen; 2.4 Verwertungskette; 2.5 Vertragliche Aspekte; 3. Teilnehmer; 3.1 Steigender Wettbewerb; 3.2 Produzenten und Rechteinhaber; 3.3 Fernsehsender und Pay-TV; 3.4 Infrastrukturanbieter; 3.5 Neue Player; 4. Verschiebung der Machtverhältnisse in der Wertschöpfungskette; 4.1 Die etablierten Spieler; 4.2 Die Herausforderer; 5. Geschäftsmodelle
    Description / Table of Contents: 5.1 Überblick5.2 Kostenlose Angebote; 5.3 Bezahlmodelle; 5.4 Tendenzen; 5.5 Kompensation; 5.6 Der Long Tail; 6. Distributionsstrategien der Content-Produzenten; 7. Sourcing-Strategien der Content-Anbieter; 7.1 Von vertikaler Integration bis zum kompletten Medienunternehmen; 7.2 Multi-Screen-Strategien; 7.3 Exklusiver Content; 7.4 Multi-Territory-Strategien; 7.5 Territoriale Vorteile; 8. Herausforderungen für die Marktteilnehmer; 8.1 Multi-Screen-Ansatz; 8.2 Mehrwert; 8.3 Konsumentenbedürfnisse; 8.4 Monetarisisierung; 8.5 Schnelligkeit; 9. Literatur; 10. Die Autorin; Werbemarkt in Deutschland
    Description / Table of Contents: 1. Entwicklung der Werbeumsätze von 2008 bis heute
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
  • 100
    Online Resource
    Online Resource
    Neue Räume, neue Zeiten : Kindheit und Familie im Kontext von Migration und sozialem Wandel (2012)
    Dordrecht : Springer
    Details
    ISBN: 9783531179452
    Language: German
    Pages: Online-Ressource (183 p)
    Edition: Online-Ausg.
    Series Statement: Kinder, Kindheiten, Kindheitsforschung
    Parallel Title: Print version Neue Räume, neue Zeiten : Kindheit und Familie im Kontext von Migration und sozialem Wandel
    DDC: 304.2
    Keywords: Electronic books
    Abstract: In diesem neuen Band der Reihe 'Kinder, Kindheit, Kindheitsforschung' werden gegenwartsbezogene und historische Fallstudien zu Kindern und Kindheit aus Russland, Zentralasien, dem Kaukasus, der Türkei und dem Balkan vorgestellt. Die Beiträge nehmen die Bedeutung von Migration und Transformation für Kinderleben im Alltag sowie für Konzepte von Kindheit in den Blick. Im Mittelpunkt steht die Frage, wie sich sozialer Wandel auf kindliche Lebenswelten und die Konstruktion von Kindheit auswirkt. Es geht weiterhin um empirische Erkenntnisse und theoretische Analysen zu Familie und Generationsbeziehu
    Description / Table of Contents: Das gebändigte Kind - Kinder außer Rand und Band. Vom sowjetischen Edukationsnarrativ zu den Schulgeschichten im neuen RusslandGaj Germanikas Schulfilme oder neue Bilder einer postsozialistischen Kindheit; Zur Geschichte eines Kindheitsbildes: Vom wilden zum gebändigten Kind; Literatur; Filme; Bildernachweis; Kleine Kinder in Kirgistan - lokale Ansprüche und globale Einflüsse; Generationale Ordnung - ein struktureller Ansatz zur Erforschung unterschiedlicher Kindheiten; »Sie wachsen daher wie das Gras auf der Wiese« - Ausgangspunkt der Studie
    Description / Table of Contents: Zur Frage der Geschlechter-Sozialisation von Kindern in TadschikistanDas »klassische Modell« der Geschlechtersozialisation; Faridun: Wenn der Vater abwesend ist; Kinderarbeit, frühes Erwachsenwerden oder »schlechte Kindheit«?; Sebo: Wenn die Mutter Arbeitsmigrantin ist; Duschanbe - Moskau - Kairo: Transnationale religiöse Erziehungspraktiken tadschikischer Familien in der Migration; Migration, Religion und Familie in Tadschikistan; Islamstudien im Ausland und die Transnationalisierung religiöser Erziehung; Weibliche Moralität und Hijab; Fazit; Literatur
    Description / Table of Contents: »We are here for caring, not educating«: Education in MoldovaA particular method of research; Caring is not educating; Ignorance and lies: making sense of the absence; Conclusion; Bibliography; III. Sozialer Wandel, Migration und Wohlbefinden von Heranwachsenden; »They say, girls are migrants …«: Vorstellungen vomguten Leben bei einer jungen Aserbaidschanerin undfamiliale Begrenzungen; Gender, gesellschaftliche Wandlungsprozesse und weibliches Aufwachsen in der Familie in Aserbaidschan; (Prä-)Sowjetische und postsowjetische Konstruktionen von Gender in Aserbaidschan
    Description / Table of Contents: Geschlechterverhältnisse und familiäres Aufwachsen im »neuen« Aserbaidschan
    Description / Table of Contents: Inhalt; Vorwort; Einleitung; Neue Räume, neue Zeiten - neue Kindheiten?; (Trans-)Migration und sozialer Wandel; Familie im Kontext von (Trans-)Migration und sozialer Wandel; Über die Beiträge in diesem Band; Literatur; Konstruktionen von Kindheit in Zeiten gesellschaftlichen Wandels; Moratorien: Kindheit, Pädagogik und Politik; Kindheit, Kindheitskonzepte und ihre Kontexte; Fazit; Literatur; I. (Post-) Sowjetische Realitäten: Kontinuitäten und Wandel von Kindheitskonzepten; Great Transformation: The World of Russian Children before and after the First World War and the Bolshevik Revolution
    Description / Table of Contents: Untersuchungsfragen, Projektanlage und ErhebungsmethodenAusgewählte Ergebnisse: Einfügen in das hierarchische Kollektiv und funktionale Erwartungen; Ergebnisdiskussion und Fazit; Literatur; II. Familie und Migration in transnationalen Kontexten; Transnationale Familienkontexte von MigrantInnen in der Türkei; Einleitung; Ein Überblick über die Migration in die Türkei; Familiäre Orientierungen im Migrationsprozess; Transnationale Familienkontexte in der Türkei; Schlussbemerkungen; Literatur; Geschlechterspezifische Kindheiten im Kontext tadschikischer Arbeitsmigration nach Russland; Einführung
    Note: Description based upon print version of record
    URL: Volltext
    URL: Volltext
    Library Location Call Number Volume/Issue/Year Availability
    BibTip Others were also interested in ...
    Online Resource
    GBV
Close ⊗
This website uses cookies and the analysis tool Matomo. More information can be found here...